projector px602ul-wh/px602ul-bk/ px602wl-wh ......notes (1) the contents of this user’s manual may...

189
Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH/PX602WL-BK User’s Manual Model No. NP-PX602UL-WH/NP-PX602UL-BK/NP-PX602WL-WH/NP-PX602WL-BK

Upload: others

Post on 15-Jul-2020

2 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

Projector

PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH/PX602WL-BKUser’s Manual

Model No.NP-PX602UL-WH/NP-PX602UL-BK/NP-PX602WL-WH/NP-PX602WL-BK

Page 2: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

Ver. 3 6/16

• Apple,Mac,MacOS,andMacBookaretrademarksofAppleInc.registeredintheU.S.andothercountries.

• Microsoft,Windows,WindowsVista, InternetExplorer, .NETFrameworkandPowerPointareeithera registeredtrademarkortrademarkofMicrosoftCorporationintheUnitedStatesand/orothercountries.

• MicroSaverisaregisteredtrademarkofKensingtonComputerProductsGroup,adivisionofACCOBrands.

• Adobe,AdobePDF,AdobeReader,andAcrobatareeitherregisteredtrademarksortrademarksofAdobeSystemsIncorporatedintheUnitedStatesand/orothercountries.

• VirtualRemoteToolusesWinI2C/DDClibrary,©NicomsoftLtd.

• ThetermsHDMIandHDMIHigh-DefinitionMultimediaInterface,andtheHDMILogoaretrademarksorregisteredtrademarksofHDMILicensingLLCintheUnitedStatesandothercountries.

• DisplayPortandDisplayPortComplianceLogoaretrademarksownedbytheVideoElectronicsStandardsAssocia-tion.

• HDBaseT™isatrademarkofHDBaseTAlliance.

• DLPandBrilliantColoraretrademarksofTexasInstruments.

• TrademarkPJLinkisatrademarkappliedfortrademarkrightsinJapan,theUnitedStatesofAmericaandothercountriesandareas.

• Blu-rayisatrademarkofBlu-rayDiscAssociation

• CRESTRONandROOMVIEWareregisteredtrademarksofCrestronElectronics,Inc.intheUnitedStatesandothercountries.

• EthernetiseitheraregisteredtrademarkortrademarkofFujiXeroxCo.,Ltd.

• ExtronandXTPareregisteredtrademarksofRGBSystems,Inc.intheUnitedStates.

• Otherproductsandcompanynamesmentionedinthisuser’smanualmaybethetrademarksorregisteredtrade-marksoftheirrespectiveholders.

• TOPPERSSoftwareLicenses

TheproductincludessoftwarelicensedunderTOPPERSLicense.

Formoreinformationoneachsoftware,see“readme.pdf”insidethe“aboutTOPPERS”folderonthesuppliedCD-ROM.

NOTES(1)Thecontentsofthisuser’smanualmaynotbereprintedinpartorwholewithoutpermission.

(2)Thecontentsofthisuser’smanualaresubjecttochangewithoutnotice.

(3)Greatcarehasbeentakeninthepreparationofthisuser’smanual;however,shouldyounoticeanyquestionablepoints,errorsoromissions,pleasecontactus.

(4)Notwithstandingarticle(3),NECwillnotberesponsibleforanyclaimsonlossofprofitorothermattersdeemedtoresultfromusingtheProjector.

Page 3: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

i

Important InformationSafety CautionsPrecautionsPleasereadthismanualcarefullybeforeusingyourNECprojectorandkeepthemanualhandyforfuturereference.

CAUTIONToturnoffmainpower,besuretoremovetheplugfrompoweroutlet.Thepoweroutletsocketshouldbeinstalledasneartotheequipmentaspossible,andshouldbeeasilyaccessible.

CAUTIONTOPREVENTSHOCK,DONOTOPENTHECABINET.THEREAREHIGH-VOLTAGECOMPONENTSINSIDE.REFERSERVICINGTOQUALIFIEDSERVICEPERSONNEL.

Thissymbolwarnstheuserthatuninsulatedvoltagewithintheunitmaybesufficienttocauseelectricalshock.Therefore,itisdangeroustomakeanykindofcontactwithanypartinsideoftheunit.

Thissymbolalertstheuserthatimportantinformationconcerningtheoperationandmaintenanceofthisunithasbeenprovided.Theinformationshouldbereadcarefullytoavoidproblems.

WARNING:TOPREVENTFIREORSHOCK,DONOTEXPOSETHISUNITTORAINORMOISTURE.DONOTUSETHISUNIT’SPLUGWITHANEXTENSIONCORDORINANOUTLETUNLESSALLTHEPRONGSCANBEFULLYINSERTED.

DOC Compliance Notice (for Canada only)ThisClassAdigitalapparatuscomplieswithCanadianICES-003.

WARNINGThisisaClassAproduct.Inadomesticenvironmentthisproductmaycauseradiointerferenceinwhichcasetheusermayberequiredtotakeadequatemeasures.

CAUTION• Inordertoreduceanyinterferencewithradioandtelevisionreceptionuseasignalcablewithferritecoreattached.Useofsignalcableswithoutaferritecoreattachedmaycauseinterferencewithradioandtelevisionreception.

• ThisequipmenthasbeentestedandfoundtocomplywiththelimitsforaClassAdigitaldevice,pursuanttoPart15oftheFCCRules.Theselimitsaredesignedtoprovidereasonableprotectionagainstharmfulinterferencewhentheequipmentisoperatedinacommercialenvironment.Thisequipmentgenerates,uses,andcanradi-ateradiofrequencyenergyand,ifnotinstalledandusedinaccordancewiththeinstallationmanual,maycauseharmfulinterferencetoradiocommunications.Operationofthisequipmentinaresidentialareaislikelytocauseharmfulinterferenceinwhichcasetheuserwillberequiredtocorrecttheinterferenceathisownexpense.

Machine Noise Information Regulation - 3. GPSGV,Thehighestsoundpressurelevelislessthan70dB(A)inaccordancewithENISO7779.

Page 4: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

ii

Important Information

Disposing of your used product

In the European UnionEU-widelegislationasimplementedineachMemberStaterequiresthatusedelectricalandelectronicprod-uctscarryingthemark(left)mustbedisposedofseparatelyfromnormalhouseholdwaste.Thisincludesprojectorsandtheirelectricalaccessories.Whenyoudisposeofsuchproducts,pleasefollowtheguidanceofyourlocalauthorityand/orasktheshopwhereyoupurchasedtheproduct.Aftercollectingtheusedproducts,theyarereusedandrecycledinaproperway.Thiseffortwillhelpusreducethewastesaswellasthenegativeimpacttothehumanhealthandtheenvironmentattheminimumlevel.ThemarkontheelectricalandelectronicproductsonlyappliestothecurrentEuropeanUnionMemberStates.Outside the European UnionIfyouwishtodisposeofusedelectricalandelectronicproductsoutsidetheEuropeanunion,pleasecontactyourlocalauthorityandaskforthecorrectmethodofdisposal.

For EU:Thecrossed-outwheeledbinimpliesthatusedbatteriesshouldnotbeputtothegeneralhouseholdwaste!Thereisaseparatecollectionsystemforusedbatteries,toallowpropertreatmentandrecyclinginaccordancewithlegislation.

According the EU directive 2006/66/EC, the battery can’t be disposed improperly. The battery shall be sepa-rated to collect by local service.

WARNING TO CALIFORNIA RESIDENTS:Handlingthecablessuppliedwiththisproductwillexposeyoutolead,achemicalknowntotheStateofCaliforniatocausebirthdefectsorotherreproductiveharm.WASHHANDSAFTERHANDLING.

ForUKonly:InUK,aBSapprovedpowercordwithmouldedplughasaBlack(fiveAmps)fuseinstalledforusewiththisequipment.Ifapowercordisnotsuppliedwiththisequipmentpleasecontactyoursupplier.

Important SafeguardsThesesafetyinstructionsaretoensurethelonglifeofyourprojectorandtopreventfireandshock.Pleasereadthemcarefullyandheedallwarnings.

Installation• Donotplacetheprojectorinthefollowingconditions:- onanunstablecart,stand,ortable.- nearwater,baths,ordamprooms.- indirectsunlight,nearheaters,orheatradiatingappliances.- inadusty,smokyorsteamyenvironment.- onasheetofpaperorcloth,rugsorcarpets.

• Donotinstallandstoretheprojectorinthebelowcircumstances.Failuretodosomaycauseofmalfunction.- Inpowerfulmagneticfields- Incorrosivegasenvironment- Outdoors

• Ifyouwishtohavetheprojectorinstalledontheceiling:- Donotattempttoinstalltheprojectoryourself.- Theprojectormustbeinstalledbyqualifiedtechniciansinordertoensureproperoperationandreducetheriskofbodilyinjury.

- Inaddition,theceilingmustbestrongenoughtosupporttheprojectorandtheinstallationmustbeinaccordancewithanylocalbuildingcodes.

- Pleaseconsultyourdealerformoreinformation.

Page 5: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

iii

Important Information

WARNING• Donotplaceanyobjects,whichareeasilyaffectedbyheat,infrontoftheprojectorlens.Doingsocouldlead

totheobjectmeltingfromtheheatthatisemittedfromthelightoutput.

Donotusetheprojectorwithitleaningtotheleftandright.Thismayresultinamalfunction,however,portraitinstal-lation*ispossible.Forportraitinstallation,installtheprojectorwiththeintakeventatthebottom.Observeprecautionsforportraitinstallation.* Acustomizedstandandasafetycover(soldseparately)needtobeattachedtotheprojector.(→page136)

Fire and Shock Precautions • Ensurethatthereissufficientventilationandthatventsareunobstructedtopreventthebuild-upofheatinsideyourprojector.Allowenoughspacebetweenyourprojectorandawall.(→pagevii)

• Donottrytotouchtheexhaustventontheleftfront(whenseenfromthefront)asitcanbecomeheatedwhiletheprojectoristurnedonandimmediatelyaftertheprojectoristurnedoff.PartsoftheprojectormaybecometemporarilyheatediftheprojectoristurnedoffwiththePOWERbuttonoriftheACpowersupplyisdisconnectedduringnormalprojectoroperation.

Usecautionwhenpickinguptheprojector.• Preventforeignobjectssuchaspaperclipsandbitsofpaperfromfallingintoyourprojector.Donotattempttoretrieveanyobjectsthatmightfallintoyourprojector.Donotinsertanymetalobjectssuchasawireorscrewdriverintoyourprojector.Ifsomethingshouldfallintoyourprojector,disconnectitimmediatelyandhavetheobjectremovedbyaqualifiedservicepersonnel.

• Donotplaceanyobjectsontopoftheprojector.• Donottouchthepowerplugduringathunderstorm.Doingsocancauseelectricalshockorfire.• Theprojectorisdesignedtooperateonapowersupplyof100-240VAC50/60Hz.Ensurethatyourpowersupplyfitsthisrequirementbeforeattemptingtouseyourprojector.

• Donotlookintothelenswhiletheprojectorison.Seriousdamagetoyoureyescouldresult.• Donotlookintothelightsourceusingopticalinstruments(suchasmagnifyingglassesandmirrors).Visualimpair-mentcouldresult.

• Whenturningontheprojector,makesurenoonewithinprojectionrangeislookingatthelens.

• Keepanyitems(magnifyingglassetc.)outofthelightpathoftheprojector.Thelightpathbeingprojectedfromthelensisextensive,thereforeanykindofabnormalobjectsthatcanredirectlightcomingoutofthelens,cancauseanunpredictableoutcomesuchasafireorinjurytotheeyes.

• Donotplaceanyobjects,whichareeasilyaffectedbyheat,infrontofaprojectorexhaustvent. Doingsocouldleadtotheobjectmeltingorgettingyourhandsburnedfromtheheatthatisemittedfromtheexhaustvent.

Page 6: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

iv

Important Information

• Handlethepowercordcarefully.Adamagedorfrayedpowercordcancauseelectricshockorfire.- Donotuseanypowercordotherthantheonesuppliedwiththeprojector.- Donotbendortugthepowercordexcessively.- Donotplacethepowercordundertheprojector,oranyheavyobject.- Donotcoverthepowercordwithothersoftmaterialssuchasrugs.- Donotheatthepowercord.- Donothandlethepowerplugwithwethands.

• Turnofftheprojector,unplugthepowercordandhavetheprojectorservicedbyaqualifiedservicepersonnelunderthefollowingconditions:- Whenthepowercordorplugisdamagedorfrayed.- Ifliquidhasbeenspilledintotheprojector,orifithasbeenexposedtorainorwater.- Iftheprojectordoesnotoperatenormallywhenyoufollowtheinstructionsdescribedinthisuser’smanual.- Iftheprojectorhasbeendroppedorthecabinethasbeendamaged.- Iftheprojectorexhibitsadistinctchangeinperformance,indicatinganeedforservice.

• Disconnectthepowercordandanyothercablesbeforecarryingtheprojector.• Turnofftheprojectorandunplugthepowercordbeforecleaningthecabinet.• Turnofftheprojectorandunplugthepowercordiftheprojectorisnottobeusedforanextendedperiodoftime.• WhenusingaLANcable: Forsafety,donotconnecttotheterminalforperipheraldevicewiringthatmighthaveexcessivevoltage.

CAUTION• Donotplaceyourfingersinsidethelenshoodwhileperformingalensshift.Failuretodosocouldresultinfingersbeingpinchedbetweenthecabinetandlens.

• Donotusethetilt-footforpurposesotherthanoriginallyintended.Misusessuchasgrippingthetilt-footorhang-ingonthewallcancausedamagetotheprojector.

• Donotsendtheprojectorinthesoftcasebyparceldeliveryserviceorcargoshipment.Theprojectorinsidethesoftcasecouldbedamaged.

• Select[HIGH]inFanmodeifyoucontinuetousetheprojectorforconsecutivedays.(Fromthemenu,select[SETUP]→[OPTIONS(1)]→[FANMODE]→[MODE]→[HIGH].)

• Donotbringtheprojectorholdingitbythelenshood.Theprojectormaybedroppeddownanditmaybecauseofhumaninjury.

• Ifasafetycover(soldseparately)isused,donotcarrytheprojectorbythecover.Thesafetycovercancomeoffandtheprojectormaybedropped,causingpersonalinjury.

• Donotunplugthepowercordfromthewalloutletorprojectorwhentheprojectorispoweredon.DoingsocancausedamagetotheACINterminaloftheprojectorand(or)theprongplugofthepowercord.

ToturnofftheACpowersupplywhentheprojectorispoweredon,usetheprojector’smainpowerswitch,apowerstripequippedwithaswitch,orabreaker.

Caution on Handling the Optional LensWhenshippingtheprojectorwiththelens,removethelensbeforeshippingtheprojector.Alwaysattachthedustcaptothelenswheneveritisnotmountedontheprojector.Thelensandthelensshiftmechanismmayencounterdamagecausedbyimproperhandlingduringtransportation.Donotholdthelenspartwhencarryingtheprojector.Doingsocouldcausethefocusringtorotate,resultinginaccidentaldroppingoftheprojector.

Remote Control Precautions• Handletheremotecontrolcarefully.• Iftheremotecontrolgetswet,wipeitdryimmediately.• Avoidexcessiveheatandhumidity.• Donotshort,heat,ortakeapartbatteries.• Donotthrowbatteriesintofire.• Ifyouwillnotbeusingtheremotecontrolforalongtime,removethebatteries.• Ensurethatyouhavethebatteries’polarity(+/−)alignedcorrectly.• Donotusenewandoldbatteriestogether,orusedifferenttypesofbatteriestogether.• Disposeofusedbatteriesaccordingtoyourlocalregulations.

Page 7: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

v

Important Information

Light Module

1. Alightmodulecontainingmultiplelaserdiodesisequippedintheproductasthelightsource.

2. Theselaserdiodesaresealedinthelightmodule.Nomaintenanceorserviceisrequiredfortheperformanceofthelightmodule.

3. Enduserisnotallowedtoreplacethelightmodule.

4. Contactqualifieddistributorforlightmodulereplacementandfurtherinformation.

Laser Safety Caution• ThisproductisclassifiedasClass2ofIEC60825-1Secondedition2007-03. AlsocomplieswithFDAperformancestandards21CFR1040.10and1040.11forlaserproductsexceptfordeviationspursuanttoLaserNoticeNo.50,datedJune24,2007.

Obeythelawsandregulationsofyourcountryinrelationtotheinstallationandmanagementofthedevice.• Thelasermoduleisequippedinthisproduct. Useofcontrolsoradjustmentsofproceduresotherthanthosespecifiedhereinmayresultinhazardousradiationexposure.

DONOTSTAREINTOTHELENSWHILEINUSE.

• Thiscautionlabelsareonthesidefaceofthecabinet.

TheexplanatorylabeloftheCLASS2LASERPRODUCTSisontherightsideoftheprojectorbody.

About High Altitude mode• Set[FANMODE]to[HIGH]whenusingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately2500feet/760metersorhigher. Usingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately2500feet/760metersorhigherwithoutsettingto[HIGH]cancausetheprojectortooverheatandtheprotectorcouldshutdown.Ifthishappens,waitacoupleminutesandturnontheprojector.

• Usingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately2500feet/760metersorhighercanshortenthelifeofopticalcompo-nentssuchasthelightmodule.

About Copyright of original projected pictures:Pleasenotethatusingthisprojectorforthepurposeofcommercialgainortheattractionofpublicattentioninavenuesuchasacoffeeshoporhotelandemployingcompressionorexpansionofthescreenimagewiththefollowingfunc-tionsmayraiseconcernabouttheinfringementofcopyrightswhichareprotectedbycopyrightlaw.[ASPECTRATIO],[KEYSTONE],Magnifyingfeatureandothersimilarfeatures.

Turkish RoHS information relevant for Turkish marketEEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur.

Thisdeviceisnotintendedforuseinthedirectfieldofviewatvisualdisplayworkplaces.Toavoidincommodingreflec-tionsatvisualdisplayworkplacesthisdevicemustnotbeplacedinthedirectfieldofview.

Page 8: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

vi

Important Information

Health precautions to users viewing 3D images

Beforeviewing,besuretoreadhealthcareprecautionsthatmaybefoundintheuser’smanualincludedwithyour3Deyeglassesoryour3DcompatiblecontentsuchasBlu-rayDiscs,videogames,computer’svideofilesandthelike.Toavoidanyadversesymptoms,heedthefollowing:• Donotuse3Deyeglassesforviewinganymaterialotherthan3Dimages.• Allowadistanceof2m/7feetorgreaterbetweenthescreenandauser.Viewing3Dimagesfromtoocloseadistancecanstrainyoureyes.

• Avoidviewing3Dimagesforaprolongedperiodoftime.Takeabreakof15minutesorlongeraftereveryhourofviewing.

• Ifyouoranymemberofyourfamilyhasahistoryoflight-sensitiveseizures,consultadoctorbeforeviewing3Dimages.

• Whileviewing3Dimages,ifyougetsicksuchasnausea,dizziness,queasiness,headache,eyestrain,blurryvision,convulsions,andnumbness,stopviewingthem.Ifsymptomsstillpersist,consultadoctor.

• View3Dimagesfromthefrontofthescreen.Viewingfromananglemaycausefatigueoreyestrain.

Power management functionInordertokeeppowerconsumptionlow,thefollowingpowermanagementfunctions(1)and(2)havebeensetwhenshippedfromthefactory.Pleasedisplaytheon-screenmenuandchangethesettings(1)and(2)accordingtotheaimofusingtheprojector.

1. STANDBY MODE (Factory preset: NORMAL)

• When[NORMAL]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE],thefollowingterminalsandfunctionswillnotwork:

HDMIOUTterminal,Ethernet/HDBaseTPort,USBPort,LANfunctions,MailAlertfunction

(→page114)

2. AUTO POWER OFF (Factory preset: 1 hour)

• When[1:00]isselectedfor[AUTOPOWEROFF],youcanenabletheprojectortoautomaticallyturnoffin1hourifthereisnosignalreceivedbyanyinputorifnooperationisperformed.

(→page115)

Page 9: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

vii

Important Information

Clearance for Installing the ProjectorAllowampleclearancebetweentheprojectoranditssurroundingsasshownbelow.Thehightemperatureexhaustcomingoutofthedevicemaybesuckedintothedeviceagain.AvoidinstallingtheprojectorinaplacewhereairmovementfromtheHVACisdirectedattheprojector.HeatedairfromtheHVACcanbetakeninbytheprojector'sintakevent.Ifthishappens,thetemperatureinsidetheprojectorwillrisetoohighcausingtheover-temperatureprotectortoautomaticallyturnofftheprojectorspower.

Example 1 – If there are walls on both sides of the projector.

30cm/11.8"orgreater 30cm/11.8"orgreater

IntakeventExhaustvent

NOTE:The drawing shows the proper clearance required for the front, back and top of the projector.

Example 2 – In the case of portrait projection.

Intakevent

Safetycover

30cm/11.8"orgreater

NOTE:• Thedrawingshowstheproperclearancerequiredforthefront,backandtopoftheprojector.• Seepage135 for an installation example on portrait projection.

Page 10: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

viii

Table of ContentsImportant Information ............................................................................................ i

1. Introduction ...........................................................................................................1❶What’sintheBox? ..........................................................................................................1❷IntroductiontotheProjector ............................................................................................2

CongratulationsonYourPurchaseoftheProjector ...................................................2General .....................................................................................................................2Lightsource·Brightness ..........................................................................................2Installation .................................................................................................................2Videos .......................................................................................................................3Network .....................................................................................................................3Energy-saving ...........................................................................................................3Aboutthisuser’smanual ...........................................................................................4

❸PartNamesoftheProjector ...........................................................................................5Front/Top ...................................................................................................................5Rear ..........................................................................................................................6Controls/IndicatorPanel ............................................................................................7TerminalsFeatures ...................................................................................................8

❹PartNamesoftheRemoteControl .................................................................................9BatteryInstallation ..................................................................................................10RemoteControlPrecautions ...................................................................................10OperatingRangeforWirelessRemoteControl ....................................................... 11UsingtheRemoteControlinWiredOperation ........................................................ 11

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation) ...............................................12❶FlowofProjectinganImage .........................................................................................12❷ConnectingYourComputer/ConnectingthePowerCord ..............................................13❸TurningontheProjector ................................................................................................14

NoteonStartupscreen(MenuLanguageSelectscreen) .......................................15❹SelectingaSource .......................................................................................................16

Selectingthecomputerorvideosource ..................................................................16❺AdjustingthePictureSizeandPosition ........................................................................18

Adjustingtheverticalpositionofaprojectedimage(Lensshift) .............................19Focus ......................................................................................................................21Zoom .......................................................................................................................21AdjustingtheTiltFoot ..............................................................................................22

❻OptimizingComputerSignalAutomatically ...................................................................23AdjustingtheImageUsingAutoAdjust ...................................................................23

❼TurningofftheProjector ................................................................................................24❽AfterUse .......................................................................................................................25

3. Convenient Features ......................................................................................26❶Turnoffthelightoftheprojector(LENSSHUTTER) .....................................................26❷TurningofftheImage ....................................................................................................26❸TurningOfftheOn-ScreenMenu(On-ScreenMute) ....................................................26❹FreezingaPicture .........................................................................................................27❺MagnifyingaPicture .....................................................................................................28

Page 11: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

ix

Table of Contents

❻ChangingLIGHTMODE/CheckingEnergy-SavingEffectUsingLIGHTMODE[LIGHTMODE]........................................................................................................29CheckingEnergy-SavingEffect[CARBONMETER] ...............................................31

❼CorrectingHorizontalandVerticalKeystoneDistortion[CORNERSTONE] ..................32❽PreventingtheUnauthorizedUseoftheProjector[SECURITY] ...................................35❾Projecting3Dvideos .....................................................................................................38

Proceduretowatch3Dvideosusingthisprojector .................................................38Whenvideoscannotbeviewedin3D .....................................................................41

❿ControllingtheProjectorbyUsinganHTTPBrowser ...................................................42

4. Multi-Screen Projection ...............................................................................48❶Thingsthatcanbedoneusingmulti-screenprojection ................................................48

Case1.Usingasingleprojectortoprojecttwotypesofvideos[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]..........................................................................................................48Case2.Usingfourprojectors(resolution:WUXGA)toprojectvideoswitharesolutionof2560×1600pixels[TILING] ...............................................................49Thingstonotewheninstallingprojectors ................................................................51

❷DisplayingTwoPicturesattheSameTime ...................................................................52Projectingtwoscreens ............................................................................................53Switchingthemaindisplaywiththesub-displayandviceversa .............................54Restrictions .............................................................................................................55

❸DisplayingaPictureUsing[EDGEBLENDING] ...........................................................56Settingtheoverlapofprojectionscreens ................................................................57BlackLevelAdjustment ...........................................................................................60

5. Using On-Screen Menu .................................................................................62❶UsingtheMenus ...........................................................................................................62❷MenuElements .............................................................................................................63❸ListofMenuItems ........................................................................................................64❹MenuDescriptions&Functions[INPUT] ......................................................................70

HDMI .......................................................................................................................70DisplayPort ..............................................................................................................70BNC ........................................................................................................................70BNC(CV) .................................................................................................................70BNC(Y/C) ................................................................................................................70COMPUTER ...........................................................................................................70HDBaseT ................................................................................................................70SLOT .......................................................................................................................70ENTRYLIST ...........................................................................................................70TESTPATTERN ......................................................................................................70

❺MenuDescriptions&Functions[ADJUST] ...................................................................74[PICTURE] ..............................................................................................................74[IMAGEOPTIONS] .................................................................................................78[VIDEO] ...................................................................................................................82[3DSETTINGS] ......................................................................................................84

❻MenuDescriptions&Functions[DISPLAY] ..................................................................85[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE] .................................................................................85[GEOMETRICCORRECTION] ...............................................................................87[EDGEBLENDING] ................................................................................................91

Page 12: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

x

Table of Contents

[MULTISCREEN]....................................................................................................92❼MenuDescriptions&Functions[SETUP] .....................................................................94

[MENU] ...................................................................................................................94[INSTALLATION] .....................................................................................................96[CONTROL] ............................................................................................................99[NETWORKSETTINGS] .......................................................................................107[SOURCEOPTIONS] ........................................................................................... 112[POWEROPTIONS] ............................................................................................. 114ReturningtoFactoryDefault[RESET] .................................................................. 116

❽MenuDescriptions&Functions[INFO.] ..................................................................... 117[USAGETIME] ...................................................................................................... 117[SOURCE(1)] ........................................................................................................ 117[SOURCE(2)] ........................................................................................................ 118[SOURCE(3)] ........................................................................................................ 118[SOURCE(4)] ........................................................................................................ 118[WIREDLAN] ........................................................................................................ 119[VERSION(1)] ....................................................................................................... 119[OTHERS] ............................................................................................................. 119[HDBaseT] ............................................................................................................120

6. Connecting to Other Equipment ...........................................................121❶Mountingalens(soldseparately) ...............................................................................121

PartNamesoftheLensMount .............................................................................121Mountingthelens..................................................................................................122Removingthelens ................................................................................................124

❷MakingConnections ...................................................................................................125AnalogRGBsignalconnection .............................................................................125DigitalRGBsignalconnection ..............................................................................126ConnectinganExternalMonitor ............................................................................129ConnectingYourBlu-rayPlayerorOtherAVEquipment .......................................130ConnectingComponentInput ...............................................................................131ConnectingHDMIInput .........................................................................................132ConnectingtoaWiredLAN ...................................................................................133ConnectingtoaHDBaseTtransmissiondevice(soldcommercially) ....................134Portraitprojection(verticalorientation) .................................................................135Stackingprojectors ................................................................................................138

7. Maintenance .....................................................................................................141❶CleaningtheLens.......................................................................................................141❷CleaningtheCabinet ..................................................................................................141

8. User Supportware ..........................................................................................142❶OperatingEnvironmentforSoftwareIncludedonCD-ROM .......................................142

NamesandFeaturesofBundledSoftwarePrograms ...........................................142Downloadservice .................................................................................................142OperatingEnvironment .........................................................................................142

❷InstallingSoftwareProgram ........................................................................................143InstallationforWindowssoftware ..........................................................................143

❸OperatingtheProjectorViatheLAN(VirtualRemoteTool) ........................................146ConnecttheprojectortoaLAN. ............................................................................147

Page 13: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

xi

Table of Contents

❹ControllingtheProjectoroveraLAN(PCControlUtilityPro4/Pro5) .........................149

9. Appendix ..............................................................................................................153❶Throwdistanceandscreensize .................................................................................153

Lenstypesandthrowdistance .............................................................................153Tablesofscreensizesanddimensions .................................................................155Lensshiftingrange ................................................................................................156

❷MountingtheOptionalBoard(soldseparately) ..........................................................157❸CompatibleInputSignalList .......................................................................................159❹Specifications .............................................................................................................162❺CabinetDimensions ...................................................................................................165❻Pinassignmentsandsignalnamesofmainterminals................................................166❼Troubleshooting ..........................................................................................................168

IndicatorMessages ...............................................................................................168CommonProblems&Solutions ............................................................................170Ifthereisnopicture,orthepictureisnotdisplayedcorrectly. ...............................172

❽PCControlCodesandCableConnection ..................................................................173❾TroubleshootingCheckList ......................................................................................... 174

Page 14: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

1

1. Introduction❶ What’s in the Box?Makesureyourboxcontainseverythinglisted.Ifanypiecesaremissing,contactyourdealer.Pleasesavetheoriginalboxandpackingmaterialsifyoueverneedtoshipyourprojector.

Projector

Dustcapforlens* Theprojectorisshippedwithoutalens.Forthetypesoflensandthrowdistances,seepage153.

Remotecontrol(7N901041)

AAalkalinebatteries(x2)

Powercord(US:79TG0251)(EU:79TG0261)

3Stackingholders(79TG0291)Whenstackingprojectors(doublestacking),thetiltfootoftheupperprojectorwillbeplacedontothesestackingholders.(→page139)

For North America onlyLimitedwarrantyFor customers in Europe: YouwillfindourcurrentvalidGuar-anteePolicyonourWebSite:www.nec-display-solutions.com

• ImportantInfomation(7N8N5113)

• QuickSetupGuide(7N8N5132)

• SecuritySticker (Usethisstickerwhensecuritypasswordisseton.)

NECProjectorCD-ROMUser’smanual(PDF)andtheutilitysoftware(7N952063)

Page 15: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

2

1. Introduction

❷ Introduction to the ProjectorThissectionintroducesyoutoyournewprojectoranddescribesthefeaturesandcontrols.

Congratulations on Your Purchase of the ProjectorThisprojectorisoneoftheverybestprojectorsavailabletoday.Theprojectorenablesyoutoprojectpreciseimagesupto500inchesacross(measureddiagonally)fromyourPCorMaccomputer(desktopornotebook),VCR,Blu-rayplayer,ordocumentcamera.Youcanusetheprojectoronatabletoporcart,youcanusetheprojectortoprojectimagesfrombehindthescreen,andtheprojectorcanbepermanentlymountedonaceiling*1.Theremotecontrolcanbeusedwirelessly.

*1 Donotattempttomounttheprojectoronaceilingyourself.

Theprojectormustbeinstalledbyqualifiedtechniciansinordertoensureproperoperationandreducetheriskofbodilyinjury.

Inaddition,theceilingmustbestrongenoughtosupporttheprojectorandtheinstallationmustbeinaccordancewithanylocalbuildingcodes.Pleaseconsultyourdealerformoreinformation.

General

• Single-chipDLPprojectorwithhighresolutionandhighbrightness

Modelname DMDpanel Resolution Aspectratio

PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK 0.67type 1,920×1,200pixels 16:10

PX602WL-WH/PX602WL-BK 0.65type 1,280×800pixels 16:10

Light source · Brightness

• Along-lifelaserdiodeisequippedinthelightmodule

Theproductcanbeoperatedatlowcostbecausethelaserlightsourcecanbeusedforalongtimewithoutrequir-ingreplacementormaintenance.

• Brightnesscanbeadjustedwithinawiderange

Unlikewithordinarylightsources,thebrightnesscanbeadjustedfrom20to100%in1%increments.

• [CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS]mode

Brightnessnormallydecreaseswithuse,butbyselecting[CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS]mode,sensorsinsidetheprojectordetectandautomaticallyadjusttheoutput,therebymaintainingconstantbrightnessthroughoutthelifeofthelightmodule.

However,ifbrightnessoutputissetatthemaximum,brightnesswilldecreasewithuse.

Installation

• Widerangeofoptionallensesselectableaccordingtotheplaceofinstallation

Thisprojectorsupports4 types,howeverPX602UL-WHandPX602UL-BKsupport3 typesofoptional lenses,providingaselectionoflensesadaptedtoavarietyofplacesofinstallationandprojectionmethods.

Inaddition,thelensescanbemountedandremovedinonetouch.

Notethatnolensismounteduponshipmentfromthefactory.Pleasepurchaseoptionallensesseparately.

• Tilt-free,portraitprojection

Thisprojectorcanbesettoanyanglewithinavertical360°range.

Itcanalsorotatethepicture90°intoportraitorientation.

Thisprojectorcannotbeinstalledwithrightorleftslantbesidestheportraitprojection.

• Doublestackableforhighlightoutputprojection

Bystacking2projectors,increasedbrightnessonalargescreenispossible.

• Powerlenscontrolforquickandeasyadjustment

Byusingbuttonsontheprojectorortheremotecontrol,zoom,focus,andposition(lensshift)canbeadjusted.

Page 16: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

3

1. Introduction

Videos

• Widerangeofinput/outputterminals(HDMI,DisplayPort,BNC,HDBaseT,etc.)andbuilt-inmonauralspeaker

Theprojector isequippedwithavarietyof input/output terminals:HDMI,DisplayPort,BNC(5-core),computer(analog),HDBaseT,etc.

Theprojector’sHDMIinput/outputterminalsandDisplayPortinputterminalsupportHDCP.

HDBaseT,promotedandadvancedbytheHDBaseTAlliance,isaconsumerelectronic(CE)andcommercialcon-nectivitytechnology.

• Slotforoptionalboard

Thisprojectorhasaslotforoptionalboards(soldseparately).

• Simultaneousdisplayof2images(PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE)

Twoimagescanbeprojectedsimultaneouslywithasingleprojector.

Therearetwotypesoflayoutsforthetwoimages:“picture-in-picture”(PIP)inwhichasub-pictureisdisplayedonthemainpicture,and“picture-by-picture”(PICTUREBYPICTURE)inwhichthemainandsubpicturesaredisplayednexttoeachother.

• Multi-screenprojectionusingmultipleprojectors

ThisprojectorisequippedwithmultipleHDMIinput&outputterminalsthatcanconnectmultipleprojectorsinadaisychain.Ahighqualitypictureisachievedbydividingandprojectinghighresolutionvideosamongthevariousprojectors.

Furthermore,theboundariesofthescreensaresmoothedusinganedgeblendingfunction.

• SupportsHDMI3Dformat

Thisprojectorcanbeusedtowatchvideosin3Dusingcommercially-availableactiveshutter-type3Deyewearand3DemittersthatsupportXpand3D.

Network

• Convenientutilitysoftware(UserSupportware)providedasstandard

ThethreeutilitysoftwarestoredintheenclosedNECProjectorCD-ROM(VirtualRemoteTool,PCControlUtilityPro4(forWindows)andPCControlUtilityPro5(forMacOS))canbeused.

• CRESTRONROOMVIEWcompatible

ThisprojectorsupportsCRESTRONROOMVIEW,allowingmultipledevicesconnectedtothenetworktobeman-agedfromacomputerorcontroller.

Energy-saving

• Energy-savingdesignwithastandbypowerconsumptionof0.5watts

Whentheon-screenmenu’sstandbymodeissetto“NORMAL”,thepowerconsumptioninthestandbymodeis0.5watts.

• “LIGHTMODE”forlowpowerconsumptionand“CarbonMeter”display

Theprojectorisequippedwithan“LIGHTMODE”forreducingpowerconsumptionduringuse.Furthermore,thepower-savingeffectwhentheLIGHTMODEissetisconvertedintotheamountofreductionsofCO2emissionsandthisisindicatedontheconfirmationmessagedisplayedwhenthepoweristurnedoffandat“Information”ontheon-screenmenu(CARBONMETER).

Page 17: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

4

1. Introduction

About this user’s manualThefastestwaytogetstartedistotakeyourtimeanddoeverythingrightthefirsttime.Takeafewminutesnowtoreviewtheuser’smanual.Thismaysaveyoutimelateron.Atthebeginningofeachsectionofthemanualyou’llfindanoverview.Ifthesectiondoesn’tapply,youcanskipit.

Page 18: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

5

1. Introduction

❸ Part Names of the ProjectorFront/TopThelensissoldseparately.ThedescriptionbelowisforwhentheNP35ZLlensismounted.

Controls(→page7)

Lens

RemoteSensor(→page11)

LensHoodProtectsthelens.

RemoteSensor(locatedonthefrontandtherear)(→page11)

AdjustableTiltFoot(→page22)

IndicatorPanel(→page7)

AdjustableTiltFoot(→page22)

ExhaustventHeatedairisexhaustedfromhere.

Page 19: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

6

1. Introduction

Rear

Stackingholderfixingposition(3positions)Forstackinguptheprojectors,fastenupthestackingholderssup-pliedwiththisprojector.

Safetycoverfixinghole(7positions)

Thefixingholesforinstallingthesafetycover(soldseparately)that

isusedforportraitinstallation.RemoteSensor(locatedonthefrontandtherear)(→page11)

ACINterminalConnectthesuppliedpowercord’sthree-pinplughere,andplugtheotherendintoanactivewalloutlet.(→page13)

MainpowerswitchWhileACpowerisbeingsupplied,setthemainpowerswitchtoONposition(|),thenyourprojectorwillenterastandbystate.

* ThissecurityslotsupportstheMicroSaver®SecuritySystem.

Built-inSecuritySlot( )*

SecurityBarAttachananti-theftdevice.

Thesecuritybaracceptssecuritywiresorchainsupto0.18inch/4.6

mmindiameter.

AdjustableTiltFoot(→page22)

IntakeventTakesinoutsideairtocooltheunit.Thereareairintakeandventilation

holesonthebottom.(→pagevii,141)

Terminals(→page8)

Page 20: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

7

1. Introduction

Controls/Indicator Panel

11 10

7

2 3 4 5 8

1

6

13

14

15 16 17

129

1. (POWER)Button (→page14,24)

2. POWERIndicator (→page14,15,24,168)

3. STATUS Indicator (→page168)

4. LIGHT Indicator (→page29,169)

5. TEMP.Indicator (→page169)

6. SOURCEButton (→page16)

7. AUTOADJ.Button (→page23)

8. 3DREFORMButton (→page32)

9. MENUButton (→page62)

10. ▲▼◀▶Buttons (→page62)

11. ENTERButton (→page62)

12.EXITButton (→page62)

13.SHUTTERButton (→page26)

14.LIGHTButton (→page29)

15.LENSSHIFT/HOMEPOSITIONButton (→page19,26,124,156)

16.FOCUS+/−Button (→page21)

17. ZOOM+/−Button (→page21)

Page 21: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

8

1. Introduction

Terminals Features

9 71

4

238

1312 1011 56

1. COMPUTER1IN/ComponentInputTerminal(MiniD-Sub15Pin)

(→page13,125,131,166)

2. DisplayPortINTerminal(DisplayPort20Pin) (→page126,166)

3. HDMIINTerminal(TypeA) (→page126,128,132,166)

4. BNCInput[R/Cr/CV,G/Y/Y,B/Cb/C,H,V]Termi-nals(BNC×5)

(→page125,130)

5. BNC(Y/C)InputTerminal(BNC×2) (→page130)

6. BNC(CV)InputTerminal(BNC×1) (→page130)

7. USBPort(TypeA) (→page167) (Forfutureexpansion.Thisportallowsforpowersup-

ply.)

8. HDMIOUTTerminal(TypeA) (→page129)

9. Ethernet/HDBaseTPort(RJ-45) (→page133,134,167)

10.3DSYNCTerminal(MiniDIN3Pin) (→page40)

11. PCCONTROLPort(D-Sub9Pin) (→page167,173) Use this port to connect aPC or control system.

Thisenablesyoutocontroltheprojectorusingserialcommunicationprotocol.Ifyouarewritingyourownprogram,typicalPCcontrolcodesareonpage173.

12.REMOTETerminal(StereoMini) Usethisjackforwiredremotecontroloftheprojector

usingacommerciallyavailableremotecablewith⌀3.5 stereomini-plug(withoutresistance).

Connecttheprojectorandthesuppliedremotecontrolusingacommerciallyavailablewiredremotecontrolcable.

(→page11)

NOTE: • Whenaremotecontrolcable isconnectedtotheREMOTE

terminal, infrared remote control operations cannot be per-formed.

• PowercannotbesuppliedfromtheREMOTEterminaltotheremote control.

• When [HDBaseT] is selected in the [REMOTE SENSOR]and the projector is connected to a commercially-available transmissiondevicethatsupportsHDBaseT,remotecontroloperations in infra-red cannot be carried out if transmission of remote control signals has been set up in the transmission device.However,remotecontrolusinginfraredrayscanbecarried out when the power supply of the transmission device is switched off.

13. SLOT (→page157)

Page 22: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

9

1. Introduction

❹ Part Names of the Remote Control

1. Infrared Transmitter (→page11)

2. RemoteJack Connectacommerciallyavailable

remotecablehereforwiredopera-tion.(→page11)

3. POWERONButton (→page14)

4. POWEROFFButton (→page24)

5. INFO/L-CALIB.Button Displaythe[SOURCE(1)]screen

oftheon-screenmenu. (→page117)

6. VOL./FOCUS+/−Buttons (→page21)

7. D-ZOOM/ZOOM+/−Buttons (→page28)

8. TESTButton (→page70)

9. ECO/L-SHIFTButton (→page20,29)

10.MENUButton (→page62)

11. EXITButton (→page62)

12.ENTERButton (→page62)

13. ▲▼◀▶Button (→page62)

14.ON-SCREENButton (→page26)

15.SHUTTERButton (→page26)

16.AV-MUTEButton (→page26)

17. PICTUREButton (→page74,76)

18.SOURCEButton (→page16)

19.3DREFORMButton (→page32)

20.PIP/FREEZEButton (→page27,53)

1

3

4

6

14

10

12

16

20

7

2

5

8

9

11

15

1817

13

2119

252832

2322

35

24

30

26

29

34

27

3136

33

21.AUTOADJ.Button (→page23)

22,23,24.COMPUTER1/2/3But-ton

(→page16)

25.VIDEOButton (→page16)

26.S-VIDEOButton (→page16)

27.HDMIButton (→page16)

28.DisplayPortButton (→page16)

29.VIEWERButton (TheVIEWERbuttonwillnotwork

onthisseriesofprojectors.)

30.NETWORKButton (→page16)

31.SLOTButton (→page158)

32.IDSETButton (→page105)

33.Numeric(0to9/CLEAR)But-tons

(→page105) (TheAUXbuttonwillnotworkon

thisseriesofprojectors.)

34.CTLButton Thisbuttonisusedinconjunction

with other buttons, similar to aCTRLkeyonacomputer.

35.LIGHTButton Thisbuttonisusedtoturnonthe

backlight for the remote controlbuttons.

The backlight will turn off if nobutton operation ismade for 10seconds.

36.HELPButton (→page117)

Page 23: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

10

1. Introduction

Battery Installation1. Press the catch and remove

the battery cover.2. Install new ones (AA). En-

sure that you have the bat-teries’ polarity (+/−) aligned correctly.

3. Slip the cover back over the batteries until it snaps into place.

NOTE:Donotmixdifferenttypesofbatteriesornewand old batteries.

1

2 1 2

Remote Control Precautions

• Handletheremotecontrolcarefully.

• Iftheremotecontrolgetswet,wipeitdryimmediately.

• Avoidexcessiveheatandhumidity.

• Donotshort,heat,ortakeapartbatteries.

• Donotthrowbatteriesintofire.

• Ifyouwillnotbeusingtheremotecontrolforalongtime,removethebatteries.

• Ensurethatyouhavethebatteries’polarity(+/−)alignedcorrectly.

• Donotusenewandoldbatteriestogether,orusedifferenttypesofbatteriestogether.

• Disposeofusedbatteriesaccordingtoyourlocalregulations.

Page 24: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

11

1. Introduction

Operating Range for Wireless Remote Control

7m/276inch

7m/276inch

RemotecontrolRemotesensoronprojectorcabinet

7m/276inc

h

7m/276inch

30°

30°

30°

30°

15°

30°

30°

30°15°

30°

• Theinfraredsignaloperatesbyline-of-sightuptoadistanceofabovemetersandwithina60-degreeangleoftheremotesensorontheprojectorcabinet.

• Theprojectorwillnotrespondifthereareobjectsbetweentheremotecontrolandthesensor,orifstronglightfallsonthesensor.Weakbatterieswillalsopreventtheremotecontrolfromproperlyoperatingtheprojector.

Using the Remote Control in Wired OperationConnectoneendoftheremotecabletotheREMOTEterminalandtheotherendtotheremotejackontheremotecontrol.

REMOTE

RemoteJack

NOTE: • WhenaremotecableisinsertedintotheREMOTEterminal,theremotecontroldoesnotworkforinfraredwirelesscommunication.• PowerwillnotbesuppliedtotheremotecontrolbytheprojectorviatheREMOTEjack.Batteryisneededwhentheremotecontrol

is used in wired operation.

Page 25: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

12

Thissectiondescribeshowtoturnontheprojectorandtoprojectapictureontothescreen.

❶ Flow of Projecting an Image

Step 1• Connectingyourcomputer/Connectingthepowercord(→ page 13)

Step 2 • Turningontheprojector(→ page 14)

Step 3 • Selectingasource(→ page 16)

Step 4• Adjustingthepicturesizeandposition(→ page 18)

• Correctingkeystonedistortion[CORNERSTONE](→ page 32)

Step 5• Adjustingapicture

- Optimizingacomputersignalautomatically(→page23)

Step 6• Makingapresentation

Step 7• Turningofftheprojector(→ page 24)

Step 8• Afteruse(→ page 25)

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Page 26: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

13

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

❷ Connecting Your Computer/Connecting the Power Cord

1. Connectyourcomputertotheprojector.

Thissectionwillshowyouabasicconnectiontoacomputer.Forinformationaboutotherconnections,see“(2)MakingConnections”onpage125.

Connectthedisplayoutputterminal(miniD-sub15pin)onthecomputertotheCOMPUTER1INterminalontheprojectorwithacommercially-availablecomputercable(withferritecore)andthenturntheknobsoftheterminalstosecurethem.

2. Connectthesuppliedpowercordtotheprojector.

Firstconnectthesuppliedpowercord’sthree-pinplugtotheACINterminaloftheprojector,andthenconnecttheotherplugofthesuppliedpowercordinthewalloutlet.

ImportantInformation:

• Whenplugginginorunpluggingthesuppliedpowercord,makesurethatthemainpowerswitchispushedtotheoff[O]position.Failuretodosomaycausedamagetotheprojector.

COMPUTER 1 IN

MakesurethattheprongsarefullyinsertedintoboththeACINterminalandthewalloutlet.

Towalloutlet

Computercable(withferritecore)(soldcommercially)

CAUTION:PartsoftheprojectormaybecometemporarilyheatediftheprojectoristurnedoffwiththePOWERbuttonoriftheACpowersupplyisdisconnectedduringnormalprojectoroperation.Usecautionwhenpickinguptheprojector.

Page 27: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

14

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

❸ Turning on the ProjectorNOTE:• Theprojectorhastwopowerswitches:AmainpowerswitchandaPOWERbutton(POWERONandOFFontheremotecontrol)•Turningontheprojector:1. Press the main power switch to the ON position (I).

Theprojectorwillgointostandbymode.

2. Press the POWER button .

Theprojectorwillbecomereadytouse.

•Turningofftheprojector:1. Press the POWER button.

Theconfirmationmessagewillbedisplayed.

2. Press the POWER button again.

Theprojectorwillgointostandbymode.

3. Press the main power switch to the OFF position (O).

Theprojectorwillbeturnedoff.

1. Press the main power switch to the ON position ( I ).

ThePOWERindicatorlightsupred.*

* ThisindicatesthattheSTANDBYmodeisin[NORMAL]setting.

(→page114,168)

WARNING

Theprojector producesa strong light.When turningonthepower,makesurenoonewithinprojection range islookingatthelens.

NOTE: • The[STANDBYMODE]settingwillbedisabledandtheprojector

will go into the sleep mode when the network service is utilized or theprojectorreceivesHDBaseTsignal.Inthesleepmode,thefansin the projector rotate for the purpose of interior parts protection. Pleaserefertopage114 about the sleep mode.

2. Press the (POWER) button on the projector cabinet or the POWER ON button on the remote control.

ThePOWERindicatorgoesfromasteadyredlighttoaflashingblue light, and thepicture is projectedon thescreen.

TIP:• Whenthemessage“PROJECTORISLOCKED!ENTERYOURPASSWORD.” is displayed, itmeans that the [SECURITY]featureisturnedon.(→ page 35)

Afteryouturnonyourprojector,ensurethatthecomputerorvideosourceisturnedon.

NOTE:Thebluescreen([BLUE]background)isdisplayedwhennosignalisbeinginput(byfactorydefaultmenusettings).

Standby Blinking Power On

Steady red light Blinking blue light

Steady blue light

(→page168)

Page 28: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

15

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Note on Startup screen (Menu Language Select screen)Whenyoufirstturnontheprojector,youwillgettheStartupmenu.Thismenugivesyoutheopportunitytoselectoneofthe29menulanguages.

To select a menu language, follow these steps:

1. Use the ▲, ▼, ◀ or ▶button toselectoneof the29languagesfromthemenu.

2. Press the ENTER button to execute the selection.

Afterthishasbeendone,youcanproceedtothemenuop-eration.Ifyouwant,youcanselectthemenulanguagelater.(→[LANGUAGE]onpage66and94)

NOTE: • Ifoneofthefollowingthingshappens,theprojectorwillnotturnon.- Iftheinternaltemperatureoftheprojectoristoohigh,theprojectordetectsabnormalhightemperature.Inthisconditiontheprojectorwillnotturnontoprotecttheinternalsystem.Ifthishappens,waitfortheprojector’sinternalcomponentstocooldown.

- IftheSTATUSindicatorlightsorangewiththepowerbuttonpressed,itmeansthatthe[CONTROLPANELLOCK]isturnedon.Cancelthelockbyturningitoff.(→ page 104)

• WhilethePOWERindicatorisblinkingblueinshortcycles,thepowercannotbeturnedoffbyusingthepowerbutton.(WhilethePOWERindicatorisblinkingblueinlongcycles,theOFFTIMERisfunctionedandthepowercanbeturnedoff.)

Page 29: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

16

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

❹ Selecting a SourceSelecting the computer or video sourceNOTE: Turn on the computer or video source equipment connected to the projector.

Detecting the Signal AutomaticallyPress theSOURCEbutton for 1 second or longer.The projectorwillsearchfortheavailableinputsourceanddisplayit.Theinputsourcewillchangeasfollows:

HDMI→DisplayPort→BNC→BNC(CV)→BNC(Y/C)→COMUPTER→HDBaseT→SLOT→ …

• Pressitbrieflytodisplaythe[INPUT]screen.

Pressthe▼/▲buttonstomatchthetargetinputterminalandthenpresstheENTERbuttontoswitchtheinput.Todeletethemenudisplayinthe[INPUT]screen,presstheMENUorEXITbutton.

TIP:Ifnoinputsignalispresent,theinputwillbeskipped.

Using the Remote ControlPressanyoneoftheHDMI,DisplayPort,COMPUTER2,VIDEO,S-VIDEO,COMPUTER1,NETWORK,orSLOTbuttons.• COMPUTER2buttonselectstheBNCinputterminal.

• VIDEObuttonselectstheBNC(CV)inputterminal(CompositeVideo).

• S-VIDEObuttonselectstheBNC(Y/C)inputterminal(S-Video).

Page 30: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

17

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Selecting Default Source Youcansetasourceasthedefaultsourcesothatitwillbedisplayedeachtimetheprojectoristurnedon.

1. Press the MENU button.

Themenuwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ▶buttontoselect[SETUP]andpressthe▼buttonortheENTERbuttontoselect[BASIC].3. Press the ▶buttontoselect[SOURCEOPTIONS].4. Press the ▼buttonfourtimestoselect[DEFAULTINPUTSELECT]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The[DEFAULTINPUTSELECT]screenwillbedisplayed.

(→page112)

5. Selectasourceasthedefaultsource,andpresstheENTERbutton.

6. Press the EXIT button three times to close the menu.

7. Restart the projector.

Thesourceyouselectedinstep5willbeprojected.

NOTE:Evenwhen[AUTO]isturnedon,the[HDBaseT]willnotbeautomaticallyselected.Tosetyournetworkasthedefaultsource,select[HDBaseT].

TIP:• WhentheprojectorisinStandbymode,applyingacomputersignalfromacomputerconnectedtotheCOMPUTER1INinputwillpowerontheprojectorandsimultaneouslyprojectthecomputer’simage.

([AUTOPOWERONSELECT]→ page 115)• OntheWindows7keyboard,acombinationoftheWindowsandPkeysallowsyoutosetupexternaldisplayeasilyandquickly.

Page 31: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

18

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

❺ Adjusting the Picture Size and PositionUsethelensshiftdial,theadjustabletiltfootlever,thezoomlever/zoomringandthefocusringtoadjustthepicturesizeandposition.Inthischapterdrawingsandcablesareomittedforclarity.

Adjusting theprojected image’s vertical andhorizontalposition[Lensshift](→page19)

Adjustingthefocus[Focus](→page21)

Finelyadjustingthesizeofanimage[Zoom](→page21)

Adjustingtheprojectedimage’sheightandhorizontaltilt[Tiltfoot]*¹(→page23)

NOTE*1:Adjusttheprojectedimage’sheightusingthetiltfeetwhenyouwanttoprojecttheimageatapositionhigherthanthelensshift adjustment range.

Page 32: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

19

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Adjusting the vertical position of a projected image (Lens shift)

CAUTION• Performtheadjustmentfrombehindorfromthesideoftheprojector.Performingadjustmentfromthefrontcouldexposeyoureyestostronglightwhichcouldinjurethem.

• Keephandsawayfromthelenshoodwhilethelensshiftisinoperation.Failuretodosocouldresultinfingersbeingpinchedbetweenthelensandthelenshood.

Adjusting with buttons on the cabinet1. Press the LENS SHIFT/HOME POSITION button.

The[LENSSHIFT]screenwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ▼▲◀ or ▶ button.

Usethe▼▲◀▶buttonstomovetheprojectedimage.

• Returningthelensshiftpositiontothehomeposition

PressandholdtheLENSSHIFT/HOMEPOSITIONbuttonfor2secondstoreturnthelensshiftpositiontothehomeposition(nearlycenterposition)

Page 33: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

20

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Adjusting with the remote control1. HoldtheCTLbuttonandpresstheECO/L-SHIFTbutton.

The[LENSSHIFT]screenwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ▼▲◀ or ▶ button.

Usethe▼▲◀▶buttonstomovetheprojectedimage.

NOTE:LensCalibrationIfthepoweroftheprojectoriswronglyshutdownduringthemotionoflensshift,itmayshiftthehomepositionofthelensandmaycauseofmalfunction.Inthiscase,performlenscalibration.Lenscalibrationprocedures1.Powerontheprojector.2.Pressandholdthe(CTL)buttonandpressthe(INFO/L-CALIB.)buttonontheremotecontrol. Calibrationisperformed.

TIP:• ThediagrambelowshowsthelensshiftadjustmentrangeforthePX602UL-WHandPX602UL-BK(projectionmode:desktopfront).Toraisetheprojectionpositionhigherthanthis,usethetiltfeet.(→ page 22)

• ForthePX602WL-WH/PX602WL-BKandtheceilingmount/frontprojectionlensshiftadjustmentrange,seepage156.

100%V

50%V

50%V20%V* 20%V*

20%V*20%V*

100%H

15%H

15%H

15%H

15%H

10%H

10%H 10%H

10%H

Heightofprojectedimage

Widthofprojectedimage

* 30%VforthePX602WL-WH/PX602WL-BK. Descriptionofsymbols:Vindicatesvertical(heightoftheprojectedimage),Hindicateshorizontal(widthoftheprojectedimage).

Page 34: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

21

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Focus1. PresstheFOCUS+/−button.

• Ontheremotecontrol,whilepressingontheCTLbutton,pressonVOL/FOCUS(+)or(−)button.

Thefocusisadjusted.

Zoom1. Press the ZOOM +/− button.

• Ontheremotecontrol,whilepressingontheCTLbutton,presstheD-ZOOM/ZOOM(+)or(−)button.

Thezoomisadjusted.

Page 35: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

22

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Adjusting the Tilt Foot1. Thepositiontoprojectimagemaybeadjustedbythetiltfeetpo-

sitionedatright,leftandrearofthecabinetbottom.

Thetiltfootheightcanbeadjustedbyitsturn.

“Toadjusttheheightoftheprojectedimage”

Theheightoftheprojectedimageisadjustedbyturningtheleftandrighttiltfeet.

“Iftheprojectedimageistilted”

Iftheprojectedimageistilted,turnoneofthetilt feettoadjusttheimagesothatitislevel.

“Toadjusttheprojectorsothatitisperpendiculartothescreen”

Turnthereartiltfoottoadjustitsheight.

• Iftheprojectedimageisdistorted,see“3-7CorrectingHorizontalandVerticalKeystoneDistortion[CORNERSTONE]”(→page32)and“[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]”(→page100).

• Thetiltfootcanbelengthenedbyamaximumof48mm.

• Thetiltfootcanbeusedtotilttheprojectorbyamaximumof6°.

NOTE:• Donotlengthenthetiltfootanymorethan50mm/1.9".Doingsowillmakethetiltfeet’smountsectionunstableandcouldcausethetiltfeettocomeofftheprojector.

• Donotuse the tilt foot foranypurposeother thanadjusting theprojector’sprojection angle.

Handlingthetiltfootimproperly,suchascarryingtheprojectorbygraspingthetilt foot or hooking it onto a wall using the tilt foot, could damage the projector.

Up

Tiltfoot(thereisonemoreintherear)

Down

Page 36: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

23

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

❻ Optimizing Computer Signal AutomaticallyAdjusting the Image Using Auto AdjustWhenanimagefromHDMIIN,DisplayPortIN,BNCinputterminal(analogRGB),COMPUTER1IN,orHDBaseTisbeingprojected,andtheedgeiscutoffortheimagequalityispoor,thisbuttoncanbeusedtoautomaticallyoptimizetheprojectionimageonthescreen.

PresstheAUTOADJ.buttontooptimizeacomputerimageautomatically.Thisadjustmentmaybenecessarywhenyouconnectyourcomputerforthefirsttime.

[Poorpicture] [Normalpicture]

NOTE:Somesignalsmaytaketimetodisplayormaynotbedisplayedcorrectly.• IftheAutoAdjustoperationcannotoptimizethecomputersignal,trytoadjust[HORIZONTAL],[VERTICAL],[CLOCK],and[PHASE]manually.(→ page 78, 79)

Page 37: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

24

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

❼ Turning off the ProjectorTo turn off the projector:

1. First, press the (POWER) button on the projector cabinet or the POWER OFF button on the remote control.

The[POWEROFF/AREYOUSURE?/CARBONSAV-INGS-SESSION0.000[g-CO2]]messagewillappear.

2. Secondly, press the ENTER button or press the (POWER) or the POWER OFF button again.

When theprojector is inSTANDBYMODE, thePOWERindicator lights up red. (When [STANDBYMODE] is in[NORMAL]setting)

3. Make sure the projector is in STANDBY MODE, then turn offthemainpowerswitch(○ OFF)

ThePOWERindicatorwillgooffandthemainpowerwillturnoff.

• While thePOWER indicator is blinkingblue in shortcycles,thepowercannotbeturnedoff.

Power On

Steady blue light

Standby

Steady red lightPress twice

CAUTION:PartsoftheprojectormaytemporarilyoverheatiftheprojectoristurnedoffwiththemainpowerswitchortheACpowersupplyisdisconnectedwhiletheprojectorisinoperationorthecoolingfanisrunning.Handlewithcare.

Page 38: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

25

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

NOTE:• Donotunplugthepowercordfromtheprojectororfromthepoweroutletwhileanimageisbeingprojected.Doingsocoulddeterioratetheprojector’sACINterminalorthepowerplug’scontact.ToturnofftheACpowersupplywhentheprojectorispoweredon,usetheprojector’smainpowerswitch,apowerstripequippedwithaswitch,orabreaker.

• DonotturnoffthemainpowerswitchordisconnecttheACpowersupplywithin10secondsofmakingadjustmentsorsettingchangesandclosingthemenu.Doingsocancauselossofadjustmentsandsettings.

❽ After UsePreparation:Makesurethattheprojectoristurnedoff.

1. Unplug the power cord.

2. Disconnect any other cables.

3. Mount the lens cap on the lens.

4. Beforemovingtheprojector,screwinthetiltfeetiftheyhavebeenlengthened.

Page 39: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

26

3. Convenient Features❶ Turn off the light of the projector (LENS SHUTTER)PresstheSHUTTERbutton.Thelightsourcewillturnoffandthelightoftheprojectorwilltemporarilygodark.Pressagaintoallowthescreentobecomeilluminatedagain.• Anotherway toshut the lightsourceoff is topress theSHUTTER

buttonontheremotecontrol.

❷ Turning off the ImagePresstheAV-MUTEbuttontoturnofftheimageforashortperiodoftime.Pressagaintorestoretheimage.

TIP:• Thevideowilldisappearbutnotthemenudisplay.

❸ Turning Off the On-Screen Menu (On-Screen Mute)ApressoftheON-SCREENbuttonontheremotecontrolwillhidetheon-screenmenu,thesourcedisplayandothermessages.Pressagaintorestorethem.

TIP:• Toconfirmthattheon-screenmuteisturnedon,presstheMENUbutton.Iftheon-screenmenuisnotdisplayedeventhoughyoupresstheMENUbutton,itmeanstheon-screenmuteisturnedon.

• Theon-screenmuteismaintainedevenwhentheprojectoristurnedoff,• HoldingdowntheMENUbuttonforatleast10secondswillturnofftheon-screenmute.

Page 40: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

27

3. Convenient Features

❹ Freezing a PictureHoldtheCTLbuttonandpressthePIP/FREEZEbuttontofreezeapicture.Pressagaintoresumemotion.

NOTE: The image is frozen but the original video is still playing ahead.

Page 41: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

28

3. Convenient Features

❺ Magnifying a PictureYoucanmagnifythepictureuptofourtimes.

NOTE: • Dependingonaninputsignal,themaximummagnificationmaybelessthanfourtimes,orthefunctionmayberestricted.

Todoso:

1. PresstheD-ZOOM(+)buttontomagnifythepicture.

2. Press the ▲▼◀▶ button. Theareaofthemagnifiedimagewillbemoved

3. Press the D-ZOOM (−) button.

EachtimetheD-ZOOM(−)buttonispressed,theimageisdemagni-fied.

NOTE: • Theimagewillbemagnifiedordemagnifiedatthecenterofthescreen.• Displayingthemenuwillcancelthecurrentmagnification.

Page 42: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

29

3. Convenient Features

❻ Changing LIGHT MODE/Checking Energy-Saving Effect Using LIGHT MODE [LIGHT MODE]Wheneither[ECO1]or[ECO2]in[LIGHTMODE]isselected,motionnoiseoftheprojectoriscutdownbyloweringbrightnessofitslightsource.Bysavingenergyconsumption,theCO2emissionfromthisprojectorcanbereduced.

LIGHTMODEIconatthebottomofthemenu

Description

NORMAL 100%brightnessThescreenwillbebrightlylit.

ECO1 Brightnesswillbeatabout80%.Thecoolingfanwillalsoslowdownaccordingly.Lowerpowerconsumption

ECO2 Brightnesswillbeatabout50%.Thecoolingfanwillalsoslowdownaccordingly.Lowerpowerconsumptionconsiderably

* Whenthebrightnessislowered,thecoolingfanspeedwillbereducedaccordingly.

Toturnonthe[LIGHTMODE],dothefollowing:1. Press LIGHT button on the cabinet.

• Inanotherway,pressECO/L-SHIFTbuttonontheremotecontrol.

The[LIGHTMODE]screenwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ENTER button.

The[LIGHTMODE]selectionscreenwillbedisplayed.

3. Use the ▼▲ buttons to make a selection, and press the ENTER button.

Thedisplaywillreturntothe[LIGHTMODE]screenandtheselectedoptionwillbeapplied.

PresstheMENUbuttontoreturntotheoriginalscreen.

Page 43: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

30

3. Convenient Features

NOTE: • The[LIGHTMODE]canbechangedbyusingthemenu. Select[SETUP]→[INSTALLATION]→[LIGHTMODE]→[LIGHTMODE].• Thelightmodulehoursusedcanbecheckedin[USAGETIME].Select[INFO.]→[USAGETIME].• Afteralapseof1minutefromwhentheprojectordisplaysablue,blackorlogoscreen,[LIGHTMODE]willautomaticallyswitchto[ECO].

• Iftheprojectorisoverheatedin[NORMAL]mode,theremaybeacasewherethe[LIGHTMODE]automaticallychangesto[ON]modetoprotecttheprojector.Thisiscalled“ForcedLIGHTMODE”.WhentheprojectorisintheForcedLIGHTMODE,thepicturebrightnessdecreasesslightlyandtheTEMP.indicatorlightsorange.AtthesametimetheThermometersymbol[ ]isdisplayedat the bottom right of the screen.

Whentheprojectorcomesbacktonormaltemperature,theForcedLIGHTMODEiscancelledandthe[LIGHTMODE]returnsto[NORMAL]mode.

Page 44: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

31

3. Convenient Features

Checking Energy-Saving Effect [CARBON METER]Thisfeaturewillshowenergy-savingeffectintermsofCO2emissionreduction(kg)whentheprojector’s[LIGHTMODE]issettoeither[ECO1]or[ECO2].Thisfeatureiscalledas[CARBONMETER].

Therearetwomessages:[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS]and[CARBONSAVINGS-SESSION].The[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS]messageshowsthetotalamountofCO2emissionreductionfromthetimeofshipmentuptonow.Youcanchecktheinformationon[USAGETIME]from[INFO.]ofthemenu.(→page117)

The[CARBONSAVINGS-SESSION]messageshowstheamountofCO2emissionreductionbetweenthetimeofchangingtoLIGHTMODEimmediatelyafterthetimeofpower-onandthetimeofpower-off.The[CARBONSAVINGS-SESSION]messagewillbedisplayedinthe[POWEROFF/AREYOUSURE?]messageatthetimeofpower-off.

TIP:• TheformulashownbelowisusedtocalculatetheamountofCO2emissionreduction.AmountofCO2emissionreduction=(Powerconsumptionin[NORMAL]LIGHTMODE–Powerconsumptionincurrentsetting)×CO2conversionfactor.*Whenanenergy-savingLIGHTMODEisselected,ortheLensShutterisused,therewillbeafurtherreductioninCO2 emission.* CalculationforamountofCO2emissionreductionisbasedonanOECDpublication“CO2EmissionsfromFuelCombustion,2008Edition”.

• The[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS]iscalculatedbasedonsavingsrecordedin15minutesintervals.• Thisformulawillnotapplytothepowerconsumptionwhichisnotaffectedbywhether[LIGHTMODE]isturnedonoroff.

Page 45: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

32

3. Convenient Features

❼ Correcting Horizontal and Vertical Keystone Distortion [CORNERSTONE]

Usethe[CORNERSTONE]featuretocorrectkeystone(trapezoidal)distortiontomakethetoporbottomandtheleftorrightsideofthescreenlongerorshortersothattheprojectedimageisrectangular.

1. Pressandholdthe3DREFORMbuttonfor2secondsatleasttoresetcurrentadjustments.

Currentadjustmentsfor[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]willbecleared.

2. Projectanimagesothatthescreenissmallerthantheareaoftheraster.

Projectedimage

Thedrawingshowstheupperrightcorner.

3. Pickupanyoneofthecornersandalignthecorneroftheimagewithacornerofthescreen.

4. Press the 3D REFORM button.

Displaythe[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]screenoftheon-screenmenu.

Page 46: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

33

3. Convenient Features

5. Press the ▼buttontoalignwiththe[CORNERSTONE]andthenpresstheENTERbutton.

Thedrawingshowstheupperlefticon( )isselected.

Thescreenwillswitchtothe[CORNERSTONE]screen.

NOTE:• Whena[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]functionotherthan[CORNERSTONE]hasbeensetup,the[CORNERSTONE]screenwillnotbedisplayed.Whenthescreenisnotdisplayed,eitherpressthe3DREFORMbuttonfor2ormoreseconds,orrun[RESET]in[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]tocleartheadjustmentvalueof[GEOMETRICCORRECTION].

6. Use the ▲▼◀▶ button to select one icon (▲) which points in the direction you wish to move the projected imageframe.

7. Press the ENTER button.

8. Use the ▲▼◀▶buttontomovetheprojectedimageframeasshownontheexample.

9. PresstheENTERbutton.

10. Use the ▲▼◀▶ button to select another icon which points in the direction.

11.Repeatstepsfrom7to10tocompletethecornerstoneadjustment.

12.Onthe[CORNERSTONE]screen,select[EXIT]orpresstheEXITbuttonontheremotecontrol.

Theconfirmationscreenisdisplayed.

Page 47: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

34

3. Convenient Features

13. Press the ◀ or ▶buttontohighlightthe[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton. Thiscompletesthe[CORNERSTONE]correction.

• Returningtothe[CORNERSTONE]screen,select[CANCEL]andpresstheENTERbutton.

NOTE: • Evenwhentheprojectoristurnedon,thelastusedcorrectionvaluesareapplied.• Carryouteitheroneofthefollowingactionstocleartheadjustmentvalueof[CORNERSTONE].• InStep12,select[RESET]andthenpresstheENTERbutton.• Pressthe3DREFORMbuttonfor2ormoreseconds.• Run[DISPLAY]→[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]→[RESET]intheon-screenmenu.

• UsingCORNERSTONEcorrectioncancausetheimagetobeslightlyblurredbecausethecorrectionismadeelectronically.

Page 48: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

35

3. Convenient Features

❽ Preventing the Unauthorized Use of the Projector [SECURITY]AkeywordcanbesetforyourprojectorusingtheMenutoavoidoperationbyanunauthorizeduser.Whenakeywordisset,turningontheprojectorwilldisplaytheKeywordinputscreen.Unlessthecorrectkeywordisentered,theprojectorcannotprojectanimage.•The[SECURITY]settingcannotbecancelledbyusingthe[RESET]ofthemenu.

To enable the Security function:

1. Press the MENU button.

Themenuwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ▶buttontwicetoselect[SETUP]andpressthe▼buttonortheENTERbuttontoselect[MENU].3. Press the ▶buttontoselect[CONTROL].4. Press the ▼buttonthreetimestoselect[SECURITY]andpresstheENTERbutton.

TheOFF/ONmenuwillbedisplayed.

5. Press the ▼buttontoselect[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The[SECURITYKEYWORD]screenwillbedisplayed.

6. Typeinacombinationofthefour▲▼◀▶ buttons and press the ENTER button.

NOTE:Akeywordmustbe4to10digitsinlength.

The[CONFIRMKEYWORD]screenwillbedisplayed.

NOTE:Makeanoteofyourpasswordandstoreitinasafeplace.

Page 49: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

36

3. Convenient Features

7. Typeinthesamecombinationof▲▼◀▶ buttons and press the ENTER button.

Theconfirmationscreenwillbedisplayed.

8. Select[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.

TheSECURITYfunctionhasbeenenabled.

Toturnontheprojectorwhen[SECURITY]isenabled:

1. Press the button.

• Ifusingtheremotecontrol,pressthePOWERONbutton.

Theprojectorwillbeturnedonanddisplayamessagetotheeffectthattheprojectorislocked.

2. Press the MENU button.

3. Type in the correct keyword and press the ENTER button. The projector will display an image.

NOTE: The security disable mode is maintained until the main power is turned off or unplugging the power cord.

Page 50: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

37

3. Convenient Features

TodisabletheSECURITYfunction:

1. Press the MENU button.

Themenuwillbedisplayed.

2. Select[SETUP]→[CONTROL]→[SECURITY]andpresstheENTERbutton.

TheOFF/ONmenuwillbedisplayed.

3. Select[OFF]andpresstheENTERbutton.

TheSECURITYKEYWORDscreenwillbedisplayed.

4. Type in your keyword and press the ENTER button.

Whenthecorrectkeywordisentered,theSECURITYfunctionwillbedisabled.

NOTE:Ifyouforgetyourkeyword,contactyourdealer.Yourdealerwillprovideyouwithyourkeywordinexchangeforyourrequestcode.YourrequestcodeisdisplayedintheKeywordConfirmationscreen.Inthisexample[NB52-YGK8-2VD6-K585-JNE6-EYA8]is a request code.

Page 51: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

38

3. Convenient Features

❾ Projecting 3D videosThisprojectorsupportsDLP-Linkglassesand3Demitter.

CAUTION

Health precautionsBeforeuse,pleasemakesuretoreadanyhealthprecautionsthatmaybestatedintheoperatingmanualsenclosedwiththe3Deyewearand3Dvideosoftware(Blu-rayplayer,games,computeranimationfiles,etc.).Pleasetakenoteofthefollowinginordertoavoidadversehealtheffects.• Pleasedonotusethe3Deyewearforpurposesotherthantowatch3Dvideos.• Pleasekeepadistanceofatleast2mawayfromthescreenwhenwatchingvideos.Watchingavideotooclosetothescreenwillincreaseeyefatigue.

• Pleasedonotwatchvideoscontinuouslyforalongperiodoftime.Pleasetakea15minutes’breakaftereveryhourofwatching.

• Pleaseconsultadoctorbeforewatchingifyouoranyofyourfamilymembershaveahistoryofsufferingfromseizurescausedbylightsensitivity.

• Pleasestopwatchingimmediatelyandtakearestwhenyoufeelphysicallyunwellwhilewatching(vomiting,gid-diness,nausea,headaches,soreeyes,blurredvision,crampsanddumbnessinthelimbs,etc.).Pleaseconsultadoctorifthesymptomspersist.

• Pleasewatcha3Dvideodirectlyinfrontofthescreen.Ifyouwatcha3Dvideoobliquelyfromthesides,thismayresultinphysicalandeyefatigue.

Procedure to watch 3D videos using this projectorThedescriptionhereareforDLP®Link.[DLP®Link]isdefaultsettingfor[3DGLASSES]atthefactory.

3D eyewear and 3D emitter preparationsUseDLP®Linkglassesorothercompatiblecommercially-availableliquidcrystalshutterspectacles.

1. Connectthevideodevicetotheprojector.

2. Switch on the projector.

3. Runthe3Dvideosoftware.

The3Dvideowillbeprojected.

Thedefaultfactorysettingis[AUTO].When3Dimageisnotprojected,itmaycauseinputsignaldoesnotcontain3Ddetectionsignaloritcannotbedetectedbythisprojector.Inthiscase,pleasesetuptheformatmanually.

(1)PresstheMENUbutton.

TheMENUwillbedisplayed.

(2)Pressthe▶button,select[ADJUST],thenpressENTER.

[PICTURE]willbehighlighted.

(3)Usethe▶buttontoselect[3DSETTINGS].

Page 52: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

39

3. Convenient Features

The[3DSETTINGS]screenwillbedisplayed.

(4)Usethe▼buttontoalignthecursorwith[FORMAT],thenpressENTER.

The[FORMAT]screenwillbedisplayed.

(5)Usethe▼/▲buttonstoalignthecursoratoneamongformatoptions,thenpressENTERforsettingitup.

Thedisplaywillreturntothe[FORMAT]screen.

PresstheMENUbuttontoreturntotheoriginalscreen.

• The3Dcautionmessagescreenwillbedisplayedwhenswitchingtoa3Dvideo(defaultfactorysettingwhenshipped).Pleasereadthe“HealthPrecautions”onthepreviouspagetowatchvideosinthecorrectmanner.Thescreenwilldisappearafter60secondsorwhentheENTERbuttonispressed.(→page95)

4. Turnonthepowersupplyofthe3Deyewearandweartheeyeweartowatchthevideo.

Anormalvideowillbeshownwhena2Dvideoisinput.

Towatcha3Dvideoin2D,select[OFF(2D)]inthe[FORMAT]screenmentionedabovein(3).

NOTE:• If3Dcontentisplayedbackonyourcomputerandtheperformanceispoor,itmaybecausedbytheCPUorgraphicschip.Inthiscaseyoumayhavedifficultyseeingthe3Dimagesastheywereintended.Checktoseeifyourcomputermeetstherequirementsprovidedinyouruser’smanualincludedwithyour3Dcontent.

• TheDLP®Linkcompatible3Deyeglassesallowyoutoview3Dimagesbyreceivingsynchsignals,whichareincludedinlefteyeandrighteyeimages,reflectedfromthescreen.Dependingonenvironmentsorconditionssuchastheambientbrightness,screensizeorviewingdistance,the3Deyeglassesmayfailtoreceivesynchsignals,causingpoor3Dimages.

• Whenthe3Dmodeisenabled,theKeystonecorrectionrangewillbenarrower.• Whenthe3Dmodeisenabled,thefollowingsettingsareinvalid. [WALLCOLOR],[PRESET],[REFERENCE],[COLORTEMPERATURE],[DYNAMICCONTRAST],[BrilliantColor]• Signalsotherthanthoselistedin“CompatibleInputSignalList”onpage160 and 161willbeoutofrangeordisplayedin2D.

Page 53: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

40

3. Convenient Features

Using a 3D emitterThisprojectorcanbeusedtowatchvideosin3Dusingcommercially-availableactiveshutter-type3Deyewear.Inordertosynchronizethe3Dvideoandeyewear,acommercially-available3Demitterneedstobeconnectedtotheprojector(ontheprojectorside).The3Deyewearreceivesinformationfromthe3Demitterandperformsopeningandclosingontheleftandright.

3D eyewear and 3D emitter preparationsPleaseuseanactiveshutter-type3DeyewearthatconformswiththeVESAstandard.Acommercially-availableRFtypemadebyXpandisrecommended.

3D eyewear ������������ Xpand X105-RF-X23D emitter �������������� Xpand AD025-RF-X1

Connectyour3Demittertothe3DSYNCterminaloftheprojector.Change[3DGLASSES]settingto[OTHERS].

NOTE:• Uponswitchingto3Dimage,thefollowingfunctionswillbecancelledanddisabled.[BLANKING],[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE],[GEOMETRICCORRECTION],[EDGEBLENDING]([GEOMETRICCORRECTION]and[EDGEBLENDING]adjustmentvalueswillbemaintained.)

• Theoutputmaynotautomaticallyswitchtoa3Dvideodependingonthe3Dinputsignal.• ChecktheoperatingconditionsdescribedintheusermanualoftheBlu-rayplayer.• PleaseconnecttheDINterminalofthe3Demittertothe3DSYNCofthemainprojector.• The3Deyewearallowsvideostobeviewedin3Dbyreceivingsynchronizedopticalsignalsoutputfromthe3Demitter. Asaresult,the3Dimagequalitymaybeaffectedbyconditionssuchasthebrightnessofthesurroundings,screensize,viewing

distance, etc.• Whenplayinga3Dvideosoftwareonacomputer,the3DimagequalitymaybeaffectedifthecomputerCPUandgraphicschipperformancearelow.Pleasechecktherequiredoperatingenvironmentofthecomputerthatisstatedintheoperatingmanualattachedtothe3Dvideosoftware.

• Dependingonthesignal,[FORMAT]and[L/RINVERT]maynotbeabletobeselected.Pleasechangethesignalinthatcase.

Page 54: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

41

3. Convenient Features

When videos cannot be viewed in 3DPleasecheckthefollowingpointswhenvideoscannotbeviewedin3D.Pleasealsoreadtheoperatingmanualattachedtothe3Deyewear.

Possiblereasons Solutions

The selected signal does not support 3D output� Please change the video signal input to one that supports 3D�

The format for the selected signal is turned to [OFF(2D)]� Please change the format in the on-screen menu to [AUTO] or a format that supports 3D�

A eyewear that is not supported by the projector is being used� Please purchase a commercially-available 3D eyewear or 3D emit-ter (recommended)� (→ page 40)

Please check the following points when a video cannot be viewed in 3D using a 3D eyewear that is supported by the projector�

The power supply of the 3D eyewear is turned off� Please turn on the power supply of the 3D eyewear�

The internal battery of the 3D eyewear is flat� Please charge or replace the battery�

The viewer is located too far away from the screen� Please get closer to the screen until the video can be seen in 3D�

Please turn the L/R INVERT in the on-screen menu to [OFF]�

Due to multiple 3D projectors working at the same time in the vicinity, the projectors may interfere with one another� Alter-natively, there may be a bright light source near the screen�

Please maintain sufficient distance between the projectors�

Please keep the light source away from the screen�

Please turn the L/R INVERT in the on-screen menu to [OFF]�

Please check the following points when videos played back on the computer cannot be viewed in 3D�

Settings on the computer are not compatible with 3D video playback�

Check to make sure that settings on the computer meet require-ments for 3D video playback�

Image resolution on the computer cannot be recognized by the projector as 3D video�

Change the image resolution on the computer to one that the projector can recognize as 3D video�

The vertical scan rate on the computer cannot be recognized by the projector as 3D video�

Change the vertical scan rate on the computer to 60 Hz or 120 Hz�

There is an obstacle between the optical receiver of the 3D eye-wear and the 3D emitter�

Please remove the obstacle�

The 3D format of the 3D video contents is not supported� Please check with the company selling the 3D video contents�

Page 55: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

42

3. Convenient Features

❿ Controlling the Projector by Using an HTTP BrowserOverviewTheHTTPServerfunctionprovidessettingsandoperationsfor:1. Settingforwirednetwork(NETWORKSETTINGS)

TousewiredLANconnection,connecttheprojectortothecomputerwithacommerciallyavailableLANcable.(→page133)

2. Setting Alert Mail (ALERT MAIL)

Whentheprojectorisconnectedtoawirednetwork,errormessageswillbesentviae-mail.

3. Operating the projector

Poweron/off,selectinginput,volumecontrolandpictureadjustmentsarepossible.

4. SettingPJLinkPASSWORDandAMXBEACON

AccesstotheHTTPserverfunctionisavailable:• StarttheWebbrowseronthecomputerviathenetworkconnectedtotheprojectorandenterthefollowing

URL :

http://<the projector’s IP address> /index.html

TIP:ThefactorysettingIPaddressis[DHCPON].

NOTE: • Tousetheprojectorinanetwork,consultwithyournetworkadministratoraboutnetworksettings.• Thedisplay’sorbutton’sresponsecanbesloweddownoroperationmaynotbeaccepteddependingthesettingsofyournetwork. Shouldthishappen,consultyournetworkadministrator.Theprojectormaynotrespondifitsbuttonsarerepeatedlypressedinrapidintervals.Shouldthishappen,waitamomentandrepeat.Ifyoustillcan’tgetanyresponse,turnoffandbackontheprojec-tor.

• IfthePROJECTORNETWORKSETTINGSscreendoesnotappearinthewebbrowser,presstheCtrl+F5keystorefreshyourwebbrowser(orclearthecache).

• Thisprojectoruses“JavaScript”and“Cookies”andthebrowsershouldbesettoacceptthesefunctions.Thesettingmethodwillvarydependingontheversionofbrowser.Pleaserefertothehelpfilesandtheotherinformationprovidedinyoursoftware.

Preparation before UseConnecttheprojectortoacommerciallyavailableLANcablebeforeengaginginbrowseroperations.(→page133)Operationwithabrowserthatusesaproxyservermaynotbepossibledependingonthetypeofproxyserverandthesettingmethod.Althoughthetypeofproxyserverwillbeafactor,itispossiblethatitemsthathaveactuallybeensetwillnotbedisplayeddependingontheeffectivenessofthecache,andthecontentssetfromthebrowsermaynotbereflectedinoperation.Itisrecommendedthataproxyservernotbeusedunlessitisunavoidable.

Page 56: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

43

3. Convenient Features

Handling of the Address for Operation via a BrowserRegardingtheactualaddressthatisenteredfortheaddressorenteredtotheURLcolumnwhenoperationofthepro-jectorisviaabrowser,thehostnamecanbeusedasitiswhenthehostnamecorrespondingtotheIPaddressoftheprojectorhasbeenregisteredtothedomainnameserverbyanetworkadministrator,orthehostnamecorrespondingtotheIPaddressoftheprojectorhasbeensetinthe“HOSTS”fileofthecomputerbeingused.

Example1:Whenthehostnameoftheprojectorhasbeensetto“pj.nec.co.jp”,accessisgainedtothenetworksettingbyspecifying http://pj.nec.co.jp/index.html fortheaddressortheentrycolumnoftheURL.

Example2:WhentheIPaddressoftheprojectoris“192.168.73.1”,accessisgainedtothenetworksettingbyspecifying http://192.168.73.1/index.html fortheaddressortheentrycolumnoftheURL.

PROJECTOR ADJUSTMENT

POWER:Thiscontrolsthepoweroftheprojector.ON ������������������������� Power is switched on�OFF ������������������������ Power is switched off�

VOLUME:Cannotbeusedforthisdevice.

AV-MUTE:Thiscontrolsthemutefunctionoftheprojector.PICTURE ON ���������� Mutes the video�PICTURE OFF ��������� Cancels the video muting�SOUND ON ������������ Cannot be used for this device�SOUND OFF ����������� Cannot be used for this device�ALL ON ������������������ Mutes the video functions�ALL OFF ����������������� Cancels the muting of the video functions�

Page 57: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

44

3. Convenient Features

PICTURE:Controlsthevideoadjustmentoftheprojector.BRIGHTNESS ▲ ���� Increases the brightness adjustment value�BRIGHTNESS ▼ ���� Decreases the brightness adjustment value�CONTRAST ▲ �������� Increases the contrast adjustment value�CONTRAST ▼ �������� Decreases the contrast adjustment value�COLOR ▲ �������������� Increases the color adjustment value�COLOR ▼ �������������� Decreases the color adjustment value�HUE ▲ ������������������� Increases the hue adjustment value�HUE ▼ ������������������� Decreases the hue adjustment value�SHARPNESS ▲ ����� Increases the sharpness adjustment value�SHARPNESS ▼ ����� Decreases the sharpness adjustment value�• Thefunctionsthatcanbecontrolledwillvarydependingonthesignalbeinginputtotheprojector.(→page76,

77)

SOURCESELECT:Thisswitchestheinputterminaloftheprojector.HDMI ��������������������� Switches to the HDMI IN terminal�DisplayPort ������������ Switches to the DisplayPort IN�BNC ����������������������� Switch to BNC video input�BNC(CV) ���������������� Switch to BNC (CV) video input�BNC(Y/C) ��������������� Switch to BNC (Y/C) video input�COMPUTER ����������� Switches to the COMPUTER 1 IN terminal�HDBaseT ���������������� Switch to image input sent from a transmission device that supports HDBaseT�SLOT ���������������������� The projector switches to video input from the optional board when an optional board (sold separately) is

equipped on�

PROJECTORSTATUS:Thisdisplaystheconditionoftheprojector.LIGHT HOURS USED ����������Displays how many hours the light module has been used�ERROR STATUS ������������������Displays the status of errors occurring within the projector�

LOGOFF:Loggingoffyourprojectorandreturningtotheauthenticationscreen(LOGONscreen).

Page 58: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

45

3. Convenient Features

NETWORK SETTINGS

•SETTINGS

WIRED

SETTING SetforwiredLAN.

APPLY ApplyyoursettingstowiredLAN.

PROFILE1/PROFILE2 TwosettingscanbesetforwiredLANconnection.SelectPROFILE1orPROFILE2.

DISABLE TurnoffwiredLANconnection

DHCPON AutomaticallyassignIPaddress,subnetmask,andgatewaytotheprojectorfromyourDHCPserver.

DHCPOFF SetIPaddress,subnetmask,andgatewaytotheprojectorassignedbyyournetworkadministrator.

IPADDRESS SetyourIPaddressofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.

SUBNETMASK Setyoursubnetmasknumberofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.

GATEWAY Setthedefaultgatewayofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.

AUTODNSON DHCPserverwillautomaticallyassign IPaddressofDNSserverconnected to theprojector.

AUTODNSOFF SetyourIPaddressofDNSserverconnectedtotheprojector.

•NAME

PROJECTORNAME Enteraname foryourprojectorso thatyourcomputercan identify theprojector.Aprojectornamemustbe16charactersorless.TIP:Projectornamewillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

HOSTNAME Enterthehostnameofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.Ahostnamemustbe15orless.

DOMAINNAME Enter thedomainnameof thenetworkconnected to theprojector.Adomainnamemustbe60charactersorless.

Page 59: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

46

3. Convenient Features

•ALERTMAIL

ALERTMAIL Thisoptionwillnotifyyourcomputeroferrormessagesviae-mailwhenusingwiredLAN.PlacingacheckmarkwillturnontheAlertMailfeature.ClearingacheckmarkwillturnofftheAlertMailfeature.Sampleofamessagetobesentfromtheprojector:

Subject:[Projector]ProjectorInformationTHECOOLINGFANHASSTOPPED.[INFORMATION]PROJECTORNAME:PX602ULSeriesLIGHTHOURSUSED:0000[H]

SENDER’SADDRESS Entersender’saddress.

SMTPSERVERNAME EntertheSMTPservernametobeconnectedtotheprojector.

RECIPIENT’SADDRESS1,2,3

Enteryourrecipient’saddress.Uptothreeaddressescanbeentered.

TESTMAIL SendatestmailtocheckwhetheryoursettingsarecorrectornotNOTE:• Ifyouexecuteatest,youmaynotreceiveanAlertmail.Shouldthishappen,checkifnetwork

settings are correct.• Ifyouenteredanincorrectaddressinatest,youmaynotreceiveanAlertmail.Shouldthishappen,checkiftheRecipient’sAddressiscorrect.

SAVE Clickthisbuttontosaveyoursettingstotheprojector’smemory.

•NETWORKSERVICE

PJLinkPASSWORD SetapasswordforPJLink*.Apasswordmustbe32charactersorless.Donotforgetyourpassword.However,ifyouforgetyourpassword,consultwithyourdealer.

HTTPPASSWORD SetapasswordforHTTPserver.Apasswordmustbe10charactersorless.Whenapasswordissetup,youwillbepromptedforyourusername(arbitrary)andpasswordduringLOGON.

AMXBEACON TurnonorofffordetectionfromAMXDeviceDiscoverywhenconnectingtothenetworksupportedbyAMX’sNetLinxcontrolsystem.TIP:WhenusingadevicethatsupportsAMXDeviceDiscovery,allAMXNetLinxcontrolsystemwillrecognizethedeviceanddownloadtheappropriateDeviceDiscoveryModulefromanAMXserver.PlacingacheckmarkwillenabledetectingtheprojectorfromAMXDeviceDiscovery.ClearingacheckmarkwilldisabledetectingtheprojectorfromAMXDeviceDiscovery.

ExtronXTP SetforconnectingthisprojectortotheExtronXTPtransmitter.Selecting[ON]willen-abletoconnectwiththeXTPtransmitter.Selecting[OFF]willdisabletoconnectwiththeXTPtransmitter.

NOTE:Ifyouforgetyourpassword,contactyourdealer.

*WhatisPJLink?PJLinkisastandardizationofprotocolusedforcontrollingprojectorsofdifferentmanufacturers.Thisstandardpro-tocolisestablishedbyJapanBusinessMachineandInformationSystemIndustriesAssociation(JBMIA)in2005.TheprojectorsupportsallthecommandsofPJLinkClass1.SettingofPJLinkwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

Page 60: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

47

3. Convenient Features

CRESTRON

•ROOMVIEWformanagingfromthecomputer.

DISABLE DisablesROOMVIEW.

ENABLE EnablesROOMVIEW.

•CRESTRONCONTROLformanagingfromthecontroller.

DISABLE DisablesCRESTRONCONTROL.

ENABLE EnablesCRESTRONCONTROL.

IPADDRESS SetyourIPaddressofCRESTRONSERVER.

IPID SetyourIPIDofCRESTRONSERVER.

•INFORMATION

WIREDLAN DisplayalistofsettingsofwiredLANconnection.

UPDATE Reflectsettingswhentheyarechanged.

TIP:TheCRESTRONsettingsarerequiredonlyforusewithCRESTRONROOMVIEW.Formoreinformation,visithttp://www.crestron.com

Page 61: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

48

4. Multi-Screen Projection❶ Things that can be done using multi-screen projectionThisprojectorcanbeusedsinglyorarrangedinmultipleunitsformulti-screenprojection.Wewillintroduceanexampleusingtwoprojectionscreenshere.

Case 1Usingasingleprojectortoprojecttwotypesofvideosatthesametime[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]

Case 2Usingfourprojectors(resolution:WUXGA)toprojectvideowitharesolutionof2560×1600pixels[TILING]

Case 1. Using a single projector to project two types of videos [PIP/PICTURE BY PICTURE]

Connection example and projection image

Inthecaseof[PICTUREBYPICTURE] Inthecaseof[PIP]

On-screen menu operationsDisplay[DISPLAY]→[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]→[MODE]screenintheon-screenmenuandselect[PIP]or[PICTUREBYPICTURE].Fordetails,pleasereferto“4-2DisplayingTwoPicturesattheSameTime”.(→page52)

Page 62: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

4. Multi-Screen Projection

49

Case 2. Using four projectors (resolution: WUXGA) to project videos with a resolution of 2560 × 1600 pixels [TILING]

Connection example and projection image

On-screen menu operations1 Foursimilarvideosaredisplayedwhenfourprojectorsareprojected.

Pleaserequestthedealertoadjusttheprojectionpositionofeachprojector.

Page 63: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

4. Multi-Screen Projection

50

2 Operatetheon-screenmenuusingthefourrespectiveprojectorstodividetheimageintofourportions.

Display[DISPLAY]→[MULTISCREEN]→[PICTURESETTING]Screenintheon-screenmenuandselect[TIL-ING].

(1)Inthescreenforsettingthenumberofhorizontalunits,select[2UNITS].(numberofunitsinthehorizontaldirec-tion)

(2)Inthescreenforsettingthenumberofverticalunits,select[2UNITS].(numberofunitsintheverticaldirection)

(3)Inthescreenforsettingthehorizontalorder,select[1stUNIT]or[2ndUNIT].

(lookatthescreens,theoneontheleftisthe[1stUNIT]whiletheoneontherightisthe[2ndUNIT])

(4)Inthescreenforsettingtheverticalorder,selectthe[1stUNIT]orthe[2ndUNIT].

(lookatthescreens,theoneatthetopisthe[1stUNIT]whiletheoneatthebottomisthe[2ndUNIT])

3 Adjustthelensshiftofeachprojectortofine-tunetheboundariesofthescreen.

Forfurtherfine-tuning,adjustusing[DISPLAY]→[EDGEBLENDING]intheon-screenmenuforeachprojector.

Fordetails,pleasereferto“4-3DisplayingaPictureUsing[EDGEBLENDING]”.

(→page56)

Page 64: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

4. Multi-Screen Projection

51

Things to note when installing projectors• Leave1moroverspacebetweentheprojectorswhenprojectorsareinstalledsidebyside,sothattheintakeandexhaustventsoftheprojectorsarenotobstructed.Inaddition,leaveaspaceofatleast30cmbetweentheintake/exhaustventandthewall.Whentheairintakeanddischargeoutletareobstructed,thetemperatureinsidethepro-jectorwillriseandthismayresultinamalfunction.

1morgreater

• Twoprojectorscanbestackedontopofeachother(STACKsetting).(→page138)Donotattempttodirectlystackthreeormoreprojectors.Whentheprojectorsarepiledupontopofoneanother,theymayfalldown,resultingindamageandfailure.

• Installationexamplewhenusing3ormoreprojectors Thefollowinginstallationisrecommendedwheninstallingacombinationof3ormoreprojectorsformulti-screenprojection.[Installationexample]

IntakeventExhaustvent Cabinet

Airdischarge

Airintake

Front Front

WARNING

Pleaserequestthedealerforspecialinstallationservicessuchaswhenmountingtheprojectortotheceiling.Nevercarryouttheinstallationbyyourself.Theprojectormayfalldownandresultininjury.Pleaseuseasturdycabinetthatcanwithstandtheweightoftheprojectorfortheinstallation.Pleasedonotpileuptheprojectorsdirectlyontopofoneanother.

NOTE:• Fortherangeoftheprojectiondistance,pleaserefertotheAppendix“Throwdistanceandscreensize”.(→ page 153)

Page 65: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

4. Multi-Screen Projection

52

❷ Displaying Two Pictures at the Same TimeTheprojectorhasafeaturethatallowsyoutoviewtwodifferentsignalssimultaneously.Youhavetwomodes:pictureinpicture(PIP)modeandpicturebypicture(PICTUREBYPICTURE)mode.Theprojectionvideointhefirstscreendisplayisknownasthemaindisplaywhiletheprojectionvideothatiscalledoutsubsequentlyisknownasthesub-display.Selecttheprojectionfunctionunder[DISPLAY]→[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]→[MODE]intheon-screenmenu(thedefaultfactorysettingwhenshippedisPIP).(→page85)• Asinglescreenisprojectedwhenpoweristurnedon.

PictureinPicturefunction(PIP)Asmallsub-displayisdisplayedinsidethemaindisplay.

Thesub-displaycanbesetupandadjustedasfollows.(→page86)• Selectwhethertodisplaythesub-displayatthetopright,topleft,bottomrightorbottomleftofthescreen(thesizeofthesub-displaycanbeselectedandthepositioncanbefine-tuned)

• Switchthemaindisplaywiththesub-display

Main Display

Sub-Display

Picturebypicturefunction(PICTUREBYPICTURE)Displaythemaindisplayandsub-displaysidebyside.

Themaindisplayandsub-displaycanbesetupandadjustedasfollows.(→ page86)• Selectingthedisplayboundary(ratio)ofthemaindisplayandsub-display• Switchthemaindisplayandsub-display

Main Display Sub-Display

Input terminals that can be used for the main screen and sub-screen.Themainscreenandsub-screencanprovidethefollowinginputterminals.• Themaindisplayandsub-displaysupportcomputersignalsuptoWUXGA@60HzRB.

Sub-Display or additional displayHDMI DisplayPort BNC BNC(CV) BNC(Y/C) COMPUTER HDBaseT SLOT

Main Display

HDMI No Yes Yes Yes Yes No NoDisplayPort Yes Yes Yes YesBNC Yes Yes

NoNo Yes Yes

BNC(CV) Yes Yes Yes Yes YesBNC(Y/C) Yes Yes Yes Yes YesCOMPUTER Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes YesHDBaseT No Yes Yes Yes Yes No NoSLOT No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No

NOTE:• Somesignalsmaynotappeardependingontheresolution.

Page 66: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

4. Multi-Screen Projection

53

Projecting two screens1. PresstheMENUbuttontodisplaytheon-screenmenuandselect[DISPLAY]→[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE].

Thisdisplaysthe[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]screenintheon-screenmenu.

2. Select[SUBINPUT]usingthe▼/▲ buttons, and press the ENTER button.

Thisdisplaysthe[SUBINPUT]screen.

3. Select the input signal using the ▼/▲ buttons, and press the ENTER button.

The[PIP](PICTUREINPICTURE)or[PICTUREBYPICTURE]screensetupunder[MODE]isprojected.(→page85)

• Whenthesignalnameisdisplayedingrey,thismeansthatitcannotbeselected.

• ThesignalcanalsobeselectedbypressingthePIP/FREEZEbuttonontheremotecontrol.

4. Press the MENU button.

Theon-screenmenuwilldisappear.

5. Whenreturningtosinglescreen,displaythe[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTUE]screenonemoretimeandselect[OFF]inthe[SUBINPUT]screenoftheStep3.

TIP:• Duringdual-screenprojection,iftheselectedinputisnotsupportedbythesub-screen,thesub-screenwillappearasablack

screen.

Page 67: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

4. Multi-Screen Projection

54

Switching the main display with the sub-display and vice versa1. PresstheMENUbuttontodisplaytheon-screenmenuandselect[DISPLAY]→[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE].

Thisdisplaysthe[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]screenintheon-screenmenu.

2. Select[PICTURESWAP]usingthe▼/▲ buttons and then press the ENTER button.

Displaythescreenforswitchingthedisplaypositions.

3. Select[ON]usingthe▼ button and then press the ENTER button.

Thevideoofthemaindisplaywillswitchwiththatofthesub-display.

Whenturned“OFF” Whenturned“ON”

Sub-displayvideo

Maindisplayvideo Sub-displayvideo

Maindisplayvideo

ThesignaloutputfromtheHDMIOUTterminaldoesnotchangeevenifthedisplaypositionsareswitched.

4. Press the menu button.

Theon-screenmenuwilldisappear.

Page 68: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

4. Multi-Screen Projection

55

Restrictions

• Thefollowingoperationsareenabledonlyforthemaindisplay.

• Visualadjustments

• Videomagnification/demaginificationusingthepartialD-ZOOM/ZOOM+/−buttons.

However,magnification/demaginificationisuptotheboundarysetin[PICTUREBYPICTURE].

• TESTPATTERN

• Thefollowingoperationsareenabledforboththemaindisplayandsub-display.Theseoperationscannotbeap-pliedindividually.

• Momentarydeletionofvideo

• Videopause

• [PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]cannotbeusedwhena3Dvideoisbeingdisplayed.

• Whenusingthe[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]function,[CLOSEDCAPTION]and[DYNAMICCONTRAST]canbeused.

• [PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]cannotbeusedwhenthesignalinputhasaresolutionof1920×1200ormore.

• TheHDMIOUTterminalhasarepeaterfunction.Theoutputresolutionislimitedbythemaximumresolutionoftheconnectedmonitorandprojector.

Page 69: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

4. Multi-Screen Projection

56

❸ Displaying a Picture Using [EDGE BLENDING]Ahighresolutionvideocanbeprojectedonanevenbiggerscreenbycombiningmultipleprojectorsontheleft,right,topandbottom.Thisprojectorisequippedwithan“EDGEBLENDINGFunction”thatmakestheedges(boundaries)oftheprojectionscreenindistinguishable.

NOTE:• Forprojectorthrowdistances,referto“Throwdistanceandscreensize”onpage153.• BeforeperformingtheEdgeBlendingfunction,placetheprojectorinthecorrectpositionsothattheimagebecomessquareintheappropriatesize,andthenmakeopticaladjustments(lensshift,focus,andzoom).

• Adjustthebrightnessofeachprojectorusing[ADJUST]under[LIGHTMODE].Afteradjustingthebrightness,youcankeepthesetbrightnesslevelbyturningONthe[CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS]mode.Inaddition,use[REF.WHITEBALANCE]toadjustthe[CONTRAST]and[BRIGHTNESS].

BeforeexplaininguseoftheEdgeBlendingfunctionThissectionexplainsthecasefor“Example:Placingtwoprojectorssidebyside”.Asshown,theprojectedimageontheleftisreferredtoas“ProjectorA”andtheprojectedimageontherightisreferredto“ProjectorB”.Unlessotherwisespecifiedhereinafter,the“projector”isusedtomeanbothAandB.

Example:Placingtwoprojectorssidebyside

EdgeBlendingarea

Projectedarea Projectedarea

ProjectorA ProjectorB

Page 70: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

4. Multi-Screen Projection

57

Preparation:• Turnontheprojectoranddisplayasignal.• Whenperformingsettingsoradjustmentsusingtheremotecontrol,enablethe[CONTROLID]soasnottoactivatetheotherprojectors.(→page105)

Setting the overlap of projection screens

①Enable[EDGEBLENDING].1. Press the MENU button.

Themenuwillbedisplayed.

2. Select[EDGEBLENDING].

The[EDGEBLENDING]screenwillbedisplayed.Alignthecursorwith[MODE]andthenpresstheENTERbutton.Themodescreenwillbedisplayed.

3. Select[MODE]→[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton.

ThisenablestheEdgeBlendingfunction.Thefollowingmenuitemsareavailable:

[TOP],[BOTTOM],[LEFT],[RIGHT],and[BLACKLEVEL]

4. Select[RIGHT]forProjectorAand[LEFT]forProjectorB.

PresstheENTERbutton.

Thefollowingitemsareavailable:

[CONTROL],[MARKER],[RANGE],and[POSITION]

Page 71: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

4. Multi-Screen Projection

58

5. Select[CONTROL]→[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Each[TOP],[BOTTOM],[LEFT],[RIGHT],and[BLACKLEVEL]hasitsown[CONTROL],[MARKER],[RANGE],and[POSITION].

• ForProjectorA,setthe[CONTROL]forthe[TOP],[LEFT]and[BOTTOM]to[OFF].SimilarlyforProjectorB,setthe[CONTROL]forthe[TOP],[RIGHT]and[BOTTOM]to[OFF].

②Adjust[RANGE]and[POSITION]todetermineanareaofoverlappededgesofimagesprojected from each projector.Turningon[MARKER]willdisplaymarkersinmagentaandgreen.Themagentamarkerisusedfor[RANGE]andgreenonefor[POSITION].

[RANGE](Determineanareaofoverlappededgesofimages.)

[POSITION](Determinethepositionofoverlappededgesofimages.)Greenmarker

Turnon[RIGHT]

Magentamarker

Turnon[LEFT]

Magentamarker

* The2screensareseparatedinthediagramforexplanatorypurposes.

Page 72: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

4. Multi-Screen Projection

59

1 Adjust[RANGE].

Usethe◀or▶buttontoadjusttheoverlappedarea.

TIP:• Adjusttooverlaponeprojector’markerwiththeotherprojector’smarker.

2 Adjust[POSITION].

Usethe◀or▶buttontoalignoneedgewiththeotheredgeofoverlappedimages.

TIP:• Whendisplayingasignalwithadifferentresolution,performtheEdgeBlendingfunctionfromthestart.• Settingof[MARKER]willnotbesavedandreturnto[OFF]whentheprojectoristurnedoff.• Todisplayorhidethemarkerwhiletheprojectorisrunning,turnonoroff[MARKER]fromthemenu.

Page 73: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

4. Multi-Screen Projection

60

Black Level AdjustmentThisadjuststheblackleveloftheoverlappingareaandthenon-overlappingareaofthemulti-screen(EDGEBLENDING).Adjustthebrightnesslevelifyoufeelthedifferenceistoolarge.

NOTE: Thisfunctionisenabledonlywhen[MODE]isturnedon.Adjustableareavariesdependingonwhatcombinationof[TOP],[BOTTOM],[LEFT]and[RIGHT]areturnedon.

Example:AdjustingtheBlackLevelwhenplacingtwoprojectorssidebyside

Widthofoverlap

Adjust[CENTER] Adjust[CENTER]

ProjectorA’simage

ProjectorB’simage

Adjust[CENTER-RIGHT] Adjust[CENTER-LEFT]

1. Turnon[MODE]

2. Select[BLACKLEVEL]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Thescreenwillswitchtotheblackleveladjustmentscreen.

3. Use the ▼ or ▲ button to select an item and use the ◀ or ▶ to adjust the black level.

Dothisfortheotherprojectorifnecessary.

Page 74: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

4. Multi-Screen Projection

61

9-segmentedportionsforBlackLeveladjustmentThecenterprojector

Thisfunctionadjuststhebrightnesslevelof9-segmentedportionsforthecenterprojectorand4-segmentedportionsfortheleftbottomprojectorasshownbelow.

TOP-LEFT

BOTTOM-LEFT

CENTER-LEFT

TOP-RIGHT

CENTER-RIGHT

BOTTOM-RIGHT

TOP-CENTER

CENTER

CENTER

BOTTOM-CENTER

TOP-RIGHT

CENTER-RIGHT

TOP-CENTER

TIP:• Thenumberofblackleveldivisionscreens(maximumofninedivisions)changesdependingonthenumberofedgeblendingpositionsselected(top,bottom,right,left).Inaddition,whenthetop/bottomandleft/rightendsareselected,thecornerdivisionscreen appears.

• Theedgeblendingwidthisthewidthsetintherangeandthecornerisformedbytheintersectingareaofthetop/bottomendsorleft/rightends.

• The[BLACKLEVEL]canbeadjustedtomakeitbrighteronly.

Page 75: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

62

5. Using On-Screen Menu❶ Using the Menus

NOTE: The on-screen menu may not be displayed correctly depending on input signal and the projector setting.

1. Press the MENU button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to display the menu.

NOTE: The commands such as ENTER,EXIT,▲▼, ◀▶ in the bottom show available buttons for your operation.

2. Press the ◀▶ buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet to display the submenu.

3. PresstheENTERbuttonontheremotecontrolortheprojectorcabinettohighlightthetopitemorthefirsttab.

4. Use the ▲▼ buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet to select the item you want to adjust or set.

You can use the ◀▶ buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet to select the tab you want.

5. Press the ENTER button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to display the submenu window.

6. Adjustthelevelorturntheselecteditemonoroffbyusingthe▲▼◀▶ buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet.

Changesarestoreduntiladjustedagain.

7. Repeat steps 2-6 to adjust an additional item, or press the EXIT button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to quit the menu display.

NOTE:Whenamenuormessageisdisplayed,severallinesofinformationmaybelost,dependingonthesignalorsettings.

8. Press the MENU button to close the menu.

To return to the previous menu, press the EXIT button.

Page 76: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

63

5. Using On-Screen Menu

❷ Menu ElementsSlidebar

Solidtriangle

Menumode

Tab

Radiobutton

HIGHsymbol

LIGHTMODEsymbol

Menuwindowsordialogboxestypicallyhavethefollowingelements:

Highlight ����������������������������� Indicates the selected menu or item� Solid triangle ���������������������� Indicates further choices are available� A highlighted triangle indicates the item is active� Tab �������������������������������������� Indicates a group of features in a dialog box� Selecting on any tab brings its page to the front�Radio button �����������������������Use this round button to select an option in a dialog box�Source �������������������������������� Indicates the currently selected source�Menu mode ������������������������ Indicates the current menu mode: BASIC or ADVANCED�Off Timer remaining time ���� Indicates the remaining countdown time when the [OFF TIMER] is preset�Slide bar ����������������������������� Indicates settings or the direction of adjustment�LIGHT MODE symbol ���������� Indicates [LIGHT MODE] is set�Key Lock symbol ���������������� Indicates the [CONTROL PANEL LOCK] is enabled�Thermometer symbol ��������� Indicates the [LIGHT MODE] is forcibly set to [ECO] mode because the internal temperature is too

high�HIGH symbol ���������������������� Indicates the [FAN MODE] is set to [HIGH] mode�

Source

Availablebuttons

Thermometersymbol

KeyLocksymbol

OffTimerremainingtime

Highlight

Page 77: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

64

5. Using On-Screen Menu

* Theasterisk(*)indicatesthatthedefaultsettingvariesdependingonthesignal.*1 The[GAMMACORRECTION]itemisavailablewhenanitemotherthan[DICOMSIM.]isselectedfor[REFERENCE].*2 The[SCREENSIZE]itemisavailablewhen[DICOMSIM.]isselectedfor[REFERENCE].*3 When[PRESENTATION]or[HIGH-BRIGHT]isselectedin[REFERENCE],the[COLORTEMPERATURE]isnotavailable.

•Basicmenuitemsareindicatedbyshadedarea.❸ List of Menu ItemsSomemenuitemsarenotavailabledependingontheinputsource.Menu Item Default Options

INPUT

HDMI *DisplayPort *BNC *BNC(CV) *BNC(Y/C) *COMPUTER *HDBaseTSLOTENTRY LISTTEST PATTERN

ADJUST

PICTURE

MODE STANDARD STANDARD, PROFESSIONAL

PRESET * HIGH-BRIGHT, PRESENTATION, VIDEO, MOVIE, GRAPHIC, sRGB, DICOM SIM�

DETAIL SETTINGS

GENERAL

REFERENCE * HIGH-BRIGHT, PRESENTATION, VIDEO, MOVIE, GRAPHIC, sRGB, DICOM SIM�

GAMMA CORRECTION*1 DYNAMIC, NATURAL, BLACK DETAILSCREEN SIZE*2 * LARGE, MEDIUM, SMALLCOLOR TEMPERATURE*3 *DYNAMIC CONTRAST * OFF, ONBrilliant Color * OFF, MEDIUM, HIGHIMAGE MODE * STILL, MOVIE

WHITE BALANCECONTRAST R 0CONTRAST G 0CONTRAST B 0BRIGHTNESS R 0BRIGHTNESS G 0BRIGHTNESS B 0

COLOR CORRECTIONRED 0GREEN 0BLUE 0YELLOW 0MAGENTA 0CYAN 0

CONTRAST 50BRIGHTNESS 50SHARPNESS 10COLOR 50HUE 0RESET

IMAGE OPTIONS

CLOCK *PHASE *HORIZONTAL *VERTICAL *BLANKING * TOP, BOTTOM, LEFT, RIGHTOVERSCAN AUTO AUTO, 0[%], 5[%], 10[%]

ASPECT RATIO

AUTO (COMPUTER) AUTO, 4:3, 5:4, 16:9, 15:9, 16:10, NATIVE

AUTO (COMPONENT/VIDEO/S-VIDEO) AUTO, 4:3, LETTERBOX, WIDE SCREEN, ZOOM

AUTO (COMPONENT/VIDEO/S-VIDEO) AUTO, 4:3 WINDOW, LETTERBOX, WIDE SCREEN, FULL

INPUT RESOLUTION * –

VIDEO

NOISE REDUCTIONRANDOM NR OFF OFF, LOW, MEDIUM, HIGHMOSQUITO NR OFF OFF, LOW, MEDIUM, HIGHBLOCK NR OFF OFF, LOW

DEINTERLACE NORMAL NORMAL, MOVIE, STILLCONTRAST ENHANCEMENT

MODE AUTO OFF, AUTO, NORMALGAIN

SIGNAL TYPE AUTO AUTO, RGB, COMPONENTVIDEO LEVEL AUTO AUTO, NORMAL, ENHANCED, SUPER WHITE

3D SETTINGS FORMAT AUTOAUTO, OFF(2D), FRAME PACKING, SIDE BY SIDE(HALF), SIDE BY SIDE(FULL), TOP AND BOTTOM, FRAME ALTERNATIVE, LINE ALTERNATIVE

L/R INVERT OFF OFF, ON

Page 78: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

65

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Menu Item Default Options

DISPLAY

PIP/PICTURE BY PICTURE

SUB INPUT OFF, HDMI, DisplayPort, BNC, BNC(CV), BNC(Y/C), COMPUTER, HDBaseT, SLOT

MODE PIP PIP, PICTURE BY PICTUREPICTURE SWAP OFF OFF, ON

PIP SETTING

START POSITION TOP-LEFT TOP-LEFT, TOP-RIGHT, BOTTOM-LEFT, BOTTOM-RIGHTHORIZONTAL POSITIONVERTICAL POSITIONSIZE MEDIUM LARGE, MEDIUM, SMALL

BORDER

GEOMETRIC CORRECTION

KEYSTONE

HORIZONTALVERTICALTILTTHROW RATIO

CORNERSTONE TOP-LEFT, TOP-CENTER, TOP-RIGHT, CENTER-LEFT, CENTER-RIGHT, BOTTOM-LEFT, BOTTOM-CENTER, BOTTOM-RIGHT

HORIZONTAL CORNER TOP-LEFT, TOP-CENTER, TOP-RIGHT, CENTER-LEFT, CENTER-RIGHT, BOTTOM-LEFT, BOTTOM-CENTER, BOTTOM-RIGHT

VERTICAL CORNER TOP-LEFT, TOP-CENTER, TOP-RIGHT, CENTER-LEFT, CENTER-RIGHT, BOTTOM-LEFT, BOTTOM-CENTER, BOTTOM-RIGHT

PINCUSHION TOP, BOTTOM, LEFT, RIGHTPC TOOL OFF OFF, 1, 2, 3RESET

EDGE BLENDING

MODE OFF OFF, ON

TOP

CONTROL ON OFF, ONMARKER ON OFF, ONRANGEPOSITION

BOTTOM

CONTROL ON OFF, ONMARKER ON OFF, ONRANGEPOSITION

LEFT

CONTROL ON OFF, ONMARKER ON OFF, ONRANGEPOSITION

RIGHT

CONTROL ON OFF, ONMARKER ON OFF, ONRANGEPOSITION

BLACK LEVEL

TOP-LEFTTOP-CENTERTOP-RIGHTCENTER-LEFTCENTERCENTER-RIGHTBOTTOM-LEFTBOTTOM-CENTERBOTTOM-RIGHT

MULTI SCREEN

WHITE BALANCE

MODE OFF OFF, ONCONTRAST WCONTRAST RCONTRAST GCONTRAST BBRIGHTNESS WBRIGHTNESS RBRIGHTNESS GBRIGHTNESS B

PICTURE SETTING

MODE OFF OFF, ZOOM, TILING

ZOOM

HORIZONTAL ZOOMVERTICAL ZOOMHORIZONTAL POSITIONVERTICAL POSITION

TILING

WIDTH 1 UNIT, 2 UNITS, 3 UNITS, 4 UNITSHEIGHT 1 UNIT, 2 UNITS, 3 UNITS, 4 UNITSHORIZONTAL POSITION 1st UNIT, 2nd UNIT, 3rd UNIT, 4th UNITVERTICAL POSITION 1st UNIT, 2nd UNIT, 3rd UNIT, 4th UNIT

Page 79: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

66

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Menu Item Default Options

SETUP

MENU

LANGUAGE ENGLISH

ENGLISH, DEUTSCH, FRANÇAIS, ITALIANO, ESPAÑOL, SVENSKA, 日本語DANSK, PORTUGUÊS, ČEŠTINA, MAGYAR, POLSKI, NEDERLANDS, SUOMINORSK, TÜRKÇE, РУССКИЙ, , Ελληνικά, 中文, 한국어ROMÂNĂ, HRVATSKA, БЪЛГАРСКИ, INDONESIA, हिन्दी, ไทย,

, 繁體中文COLOR SELECT COLOR COLOR, MONOCHROMEINPUT DISPLAY ON OFF, ONMESSAGE DISPLAY ON OFF, ONID DISPLAY ON OFF, ON3D CAUTION MESSAGE ON OFF, ON

DISPLAY TIME AUTO 45 SEC MANUAL, AUTO 5 SEC, AUTO 15 SEC, AUTO 45 SEC

INSTALLATION

ORIENTATION AUTO AUTO, DESKTOP FRONT, CEILING REAR, DESKTOP REAR, CEILING FRONT

SCREEN TYPE FREE FREE, 4:3 SCREEN, 16:9 SCREEN, 16:10 SCREEN

WALL COLOR OFF OFF, BLACKBOARD, BLACKBOARD (GRAY), LIGHT YELLOW, LIGHT GREEN, LIGHT BLUE, SKY BLUE, LIGHT ROSE, PINK

FAN MODE AUTO AUTO, HIGH

LIGHT MODELIGHT MODE NORMAL NORMAL, ECO1, ECO2CONSTANT BRIGHTNESS OFF OFF, ONADJUST 20–100%

REF� WHITE BALANCE

CONTRAST RCONTRAST GCONTRAST BBRIGHTNESS RBRIGHTNESS GBRIGHTNESS BUNIFORMITY RUNIFORMITY B

3D GLASSES DLP® Link DLP® Link, OTHERS

Page 80: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

67

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Menu Item Default Options

SETUP CONTROL

TOOLS

ADMINISTRA-TOR MODE

MENU MODE ADVANCED ADVANCED, BASICNOT SAVE SETTING VALUES OFF OFF, ONNEW PASSWORDCONFIRM PASSWORD

PROGRAM TIMER

ENABLE OFF OFF, ON

SETTINGS

EDIT

ACTIVE OFF, ON

DAY SUN, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, SAT, MON-FRI, MON-SAT, EVERY DAY

TIMEFUNCTION POWER, INPUT, LIGHT MODEADVANCED SETTINGSPOWER OFF, ON

INPUT HDMI, DisplayPort, BNC, BNC(CV), BNC(Y/C), COMPUTER, HDBaseT, SLOT

LIGHT MODE NORMAL, ECO1, ECO2REPEAT OFF, ON

DELETEUPDOWNBACK

DATE AND TIME SETTINGS

TIME ZONE SETTIMGS

GMT

-12:00, -11:30, -11:00, -10:30, -10:00, -09:30, -09:00, -08:30, -08:00, -07:30, -07:00, -06:30, -06:00, -05:30, -05:00, -04:30, -04:00, -03:30, -03:00, -02:30, -02:00, -01:30, -01:00, -00:30, 00:00, +00:30, +01:00, +01:30, +02:00, +02:30, +03:00, +03:30, +04:00, +04;30, +05:00, +05:30, +06:00, +06:30, +07:00, +07:30, +08:00, +08:30, +09:00, +09:30, +10:00, +10:30, +11:00, +11:30, +12:00, +12:30, +13:00

DATE AND TIME SETTINGS

DATE MM/DD/YYYYTIME HH:MMINTERNET TIME SERVER OFF, ON

IP ADDRESSUPDATE

SUMMER TIME SETTINGS

ENABLE OFF, ONMON(START) 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12

DAY(START)FIRST WEEK, SECOND WEEK, THIRD WEEK, FOURTH WEEK, LAST WEEKSUN, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, SAT

TIME(START)MON(EXIT) 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12

DAY(EXIT)FIRST WEEK, SECOND WEEK, THIRD WEEK, FOURTH WEEK, LAST WEEKSUN, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, SAT

TIME(EXIT)TIME DIFFERENCE +01:00, +00:30, -00:30, -01:00

MOUSE (Note) Cannot be used for this device�CONTROL PANEL LOCK OFF OFF, ONSECURITY OFF OFF, ONCOMMUNICATION SPEED 38400bps 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 115200bps

CONTROL ID CONTROL ID NUMBER 1 1–254CONTROL ID OFF OFF, ON

REMOTE SENSOR FRONT/BACK FRONT/BACK, FRONT, BACK, HDBase-T

Page 81: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

68

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Menu Item Default Options

SETUP

NETWORK SETTINGS

WIRED LAN

PROFILES DISABLE, PROFILE 1, PROFILE 2DHCP OFF, ONIP ADDRESS 192�168�0�10SUBNET MASK 255�255�255�0GATEWAY 192�168�0�1AUTO DNS OFF, ONDNS CONFIGURATIONRECONNECT

PROJECTOR NAME PROJECTOR NAME PX602UL Series

DOMAIN HOST NAME necpjDOMAIN NAME

ALERT MAIL

ALERT MAIL OFF, ONHOST NAMEDOMAIN NAMESENDER'S ADDRESSSMTP SERVER NAMERECIPIENT'S ADDRESS 1RECIPIENT'S ADDRESS 2RECIPIENT'S ADDRESS 3TEST MAIL

NETWORK SERVICE

HTTP SERVER NEW PASSWORDCONFIRM PASSWORD

PJLink NEW PASSWORDCONFIRM PASSWORD

AMX BEACON OFF OFF, ON

CRESTRON ROOMVIEW OFF, ONCRESTRON CONTROL ENABLE, CONTROLLER IP ADDRESS, IP ID

Extron XTP OFF OFF, ON

SOURCE OPTIONS

AUTO ADJUST NORMAL OFF, NORMAL, FINE

COLOR SYSTEM BNC(VIDEO) AUTO AUTO, NTSC3�58, NTSC4�43, PAL, PAL-M, PAL-N, PAL60, SECAMBNC(Y/C) AUTO AUTO, NTSC3�58, NTSC4�43, PAL, PAL-M, PAL-N, PAL60, SECAM

DEFAULT INPUT SELECT LAST LAST, AUTO, HDMI, DisplayPort, BNC, BNC(CV), BNC(Y/C), COMPUTER, HDBaseT, SLOT

CLOSED CAPTION OFF OFF, CAPTION1, CAPTION2, CAPTION3, CAPTION4, TEXT1, TEXT2, TEXT3, TEXT4

BACKGROUND BLUE BLUE, BLACK, LOGO

POWER OPTIONS

STANDBY MODE NORMAL NORMAL, NETWORK STANDBYDIRECT POWER ON OFF OFF, ONAUTO POWER ON SELECT OFF OFF, HDMI, DisplayPort, COMPUTER, HDBaseT, SLOTAUTO POWER OFF 1:00 OFF, 0:05, 0:10, 0:15, 0:20, 0:30, 1:00OFF TIMER OFF OFF, 0:30, 1:00, 2:00, 4:00, 8:00, 12:00, 16:00

SLOT POWER PROJECTOR ON ON OFF, ONPROJECTOR STANDBY ENABLE DISABLE, ENABLE

RESETCURRENT SIGNALALL DATAALL DATA (INCLUDING ENTRY LIST)

Page 82: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

69

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Menu Item Default Options

INFO�

USAGE TIME LIGHT HOURS USEDTOTAL CARBON SAVINGS

SOURCE(1)

INPUT TERMINALRESOLUTIONHORIZONTAL FREQUENCYVERTICAL FREQUENCYSYNC TYPESYNC POLARITYSCAN TYPESOURCE NAMEENTRY NO�

SOURCE(2)

SIGNAL TYPEVIDEO TYPEBIT DEPTHVIDEO LEVELLINK RATELINK LANE3D FORMAT

SOURCE(3)

INPUT TERMINALRESOLUTIONHORIZONTAL FREQUENCYVERTICAL FREQUENCYSYNC TYPESYNC POLARITYSCAN TYPESOURCE NAMEENTRY NO�

SOURCE(4)

SIGNAL TYPEVIDEO TYPEBIT DEPTHVIDEO LEVELLINK RATELINK LANE3D FORMAT

WIRED LAN

IP ADDRESSSUBNET MASKGATEWAYMAC ADDRESS

VERSION(1)FIRMWAREDATASUB-CPU

OTHERS

DATE TIMEPROJECTOR NAMEMODEL NO�SERIAL NUMBERCONTROL ID (when [CONTROL ID] is set)

HDBaseT

SIGNAL QUALITYOPERATION MODELINK STATUSHDMI STATUS

Page 83: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

70

5. Using On-Screen Menu

❹ Menu Descriptions & Functions [INPUT]

HDMIThisprojectsthevideoofthedeviceconnectedtotheHDMIINterminal.

DisplayPortThisprojectsthevideoofthedeviceconnectedtotheDisplayPortINterminal.

BNCThisprojectsthevideoofthedeviceconnectedtothevideoinputterminal.(ThisprojectstheanalogRGBsignalorcomponentsignal.)

BNC(CV)ThisprojectsthevideoofthedeviceconnectedtotheBNC(CV)videoinputterminal.(Thisprojectsthecompositevideosignal.)

BNC(Y/C)ThisprojectsthevideoofthedeviceconnectedtotheBNC(Y/C)videoinputterminal.(ThisprojectstheS-videosignal.)

COMPUTERThisprojectsthevideoofthedeviceconnectedtotheCOMPUTER1INterminal.(ThisprojectstheanalogRGBsignalorcomponentsignal.)

HDBaseTProjectingtheHDBaseTorWIREDLANsignal.

SLOTProjectsthepictureviatheoptionalboard(soldseparately)insertedintotheSLOT.

ENTRY LISTDisplaysalistofsignals.Seethefollowingpages.

TEST PATTERNClosesthemenuandswitchestothetestpatternscreen.Selectthepatternusingthe◀▶buttons.

Page 84: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

71

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Using the Entry ListWhenanysourceadjustmentsaremade,theadjustmentsareautomaticallyregisteredintheEntryList.The(adjust-mentvaluesof)registeredsignalscanbeloadedfromtheEntryListwhenevernecessary.However,onlyupto100patternscanberegisteredintheEntryList.When100patternshavebeenregisteredintheEntryList,anerrormessageisthendisplayedandnoadditionalpatternscanberegistered.Youshouldthusdelete(adjustmentvaluesof)signalsthatarenolongerneeded.

Displaying the Entry list1. Press the MENU button.

Themenuwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ◀ or ▶buttontoselect[INPUT]. TheINPUTlistwillbedisplayed.

3. Use the ◀, ▶, ▲, or ▼toselect[ENTRYLIST]andpresstheENTERbutton. TheENTRYLISTwindowswillbedisplayed.

IftheENTRYLISTwindowisnotdisplayed,switchthemenuto[ADVANCED].

Toswitchthemenubetween[ADVANCED]and[BASIC],select[SETUP]→[CONTROL]→[TOOLS]→[ADMIN-ISTRATORMODE]→[MENUMODE].(→page99)

Page 85: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

72

5. Using On-Screen Menu

EnteringthecurrentlyprojectedsignalintotheEntryList[STORE]

1. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select any number.

2. Press the ◀ or ▶buttontoselect[STORE]andpresstheENTERbutton.

CallingupasignalfromtheEntryList[LOAD]Pressthe▲ or ▼buttontoselectasignalandpresstheENTERbutton.

EditingasignalfromtheEntryList[EDIT]

1. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a signal you wish to edit.

2. Press the ◀, ▶, ▲, or ▼buttontoselect[EDIT]andpresstheENTERbutton. TheEditwindowwillbedisplayed.

SOURCENAME Enterasignalname.Upto18alphanumericcharacterscanbeused.INPUT Theinputterminalcanbechanged.SwitchingbetweenHDMI/DisplayPort/BNC/BNC(CV)/

BNC(Y/C)/Computer/HDBaseT/SLOTispossible.LOCK Setso that theselectedsignalcannotbedeletedwhen [ALLDELETE] isexecuted.The

changesmadeafterLOCKexecutioncannotbesaved.SKIP Setsothattheselectedsignalwillbeskippedduringautosearch.

3. Settheaboveitemsandselect[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.

NOTE: The input terminal cannot be changed to the currently projected signal.

Page 86: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

73

5. Using On-Screen Menu

CuttingasignalfromtheEntryList[CUT]

1. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a signal you wish to delete.

2. Press the ◀, ▶, ▲, or ▼buttontoselect[CUT]andpresstheENTERbutton. ThesignalwillbedeletedfromtheEntryListandthedeletedsignalwillbedisplayedontheclipboardatthebot-

tomoftheEntryList.

NOTE:• Thecurrentlyprojectedsignalcannotbedeleted.• Whenthelockedsignalisselected,itwillbedisplayedingraywhichindicatesitisnotavailable.

TIP:• DataontheclipboardcanbepassedontotheEntryList.• DataontheclipboardwillnotbelostaftertheEntryListisclosed.

CopyingandpastingasignalfromtheEntryList[COPY]/[PASTE]

1. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a signal you wish to copy.

2. Press the ◀, ▶, ▲, or ▼buttontoselect[COPY]andpresstheENTERbutton. ThecopiedsignalwillbedisplayedontheclipboardatthebottomoftheEntryList.

3. Press the ◀ or ▶ button to move to the list.

4. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a signal.

5. Press the ◀, ▶, ▲, or ▼buttontoselect[PASTE]andpresstheENTERbutton. Dataontheclipboardwillbepastedtothesignal.

DeletingallthesignalsfromtheEntryList[ALLDELTE]

1. Press the ◀, ▶, ▲, or ▼buttontoselect[ALLDELETE]andpresstheENTERbutton. Theconfirmationmessagewillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ◀ or ▶buttontoselect[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.

NOTE: The locked signal cannot be deleted.

Page 87: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

74

5. Using On-Screen Menu

❺ Menu Descriptions & Functions [ADJUST][PICTURE]

[MODE]Thisfunctionallowsyoutodeterminehowtosavesettingsfor[DETAILSETTINGS]of[PRESET]foreachinput.

STANDARD ������������ Saves settings for each item of [PRESET] (Preset 1 through 7)PROFESSIONAL ����� Saves all the settings of [PICTURE] for each input�

NOTE: • When[TESTPATTERN]isdisplayed,[MODE]cannotbeselected.

[PRESET]Thisfunctionallowsyoutoselectoptimizedsettingsforyourprojectedimage.Youcanadjustneutraltintforyellow,cyanormagenta.Therearesevenfactorypresetsoptimizedforvarioustypesofimages.Youcanalsouse[DETAILSETTINGS]tosetuseradjustablesettingstocustomizeeachgammaorcolor.Yoursettingscanbestoredin[PRESET1]to[PRESET7].

HIGH-BRIGHT �������� Recommended for use in a brightly lit room�PRESENTATION ����� Recommended for making a presentation using a PowerPoint file�VIDEO �������������������� Recommended for typical TV program viewing�MOVIE ������������������� Recommended for movies�GRAPHIC ��������������� Recommended for graphics�sRGB ��������������������� Standard color valuesDICOM SIM� ���������� Recommended for DICOM simulation format�

NOTE: • The[DICOMSIM.]optionisfortraining/referenceonlyandshouldnotbeusedforactualdiagnosis.• DICOMstandsforDigitalImagingandCommunicationsinMedicine.ItisastandarddevelopedbytheAmericanCollegeofRadiol-ogy(ACR)andtheNationalElectricalManufacturersAssociation(NEMA).

Thestandardspecifieshowdigitalimagedatacanbemovedfromsystemtosystem.• Adjustmentmaynotworkdependingoninputsignal.

Page 88: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

75

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[DETAILSETTINGS]

[GENERAL]StoringYourCustomizedSettings[REFERENCE]Thisfunctionallowsyoutostoreyourcustomizedsettingsin[PRESET1]to[PRESET7].First,selectabasepresetmodefrom[REFERENCE],thenset[GAMMACORRECTION]and[COLORTEMPERATURE].

HIGH-BRIGHT �������� Recommended for use in a brightly lit room�PRESENTATION ����� Recommended for making a presentation using a PowerPoint file�VIDEO �������������������� Recommended for typical TV program viewing�MOVIE ������������������� Recommended for movies�GRAPHIC ��������������� Recommended for graphics�sRGB ��������������������� Standard color values�DICOM SIM� ���������� Recommended for DICOM simulation format�

SelectingGammaCorrectionMode[GAMMACORRECTION]Eachmodeisrecommendedfor:

DYNAMIC �������������� Creates a high-contrast picture�NATURAL ��������������� Natural reproduction of the picture�BLACK DETAIL ������� Emphasizes detail in dark areas of the picture�

NOTE:Thisfunctionisnotavailablewhen[DICOMSIM.]isselectedfor[DETAILSETTINGS].

SelectingScreenSizeforDICOMSIM[SCREENSIZE]Thisfunctionwillperformgammacorrectionappropriateforthescreensize.

LARGE ������������������� For screen size of 150"MEDIUM ���������������� For screen size of 100"SMALL ������������������� For screen size of 50"

NOTE:Thisfunctionisavailableonlywhen[DICOMSIM.]isselectedfor[DETAILSETTINGS].

Page 89: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

76

5. Using On-Screen Menu

AdjustingColorTemperature[COLORTEMPERATURE]Thisoptionallowsyoutoselectthecolortemperatureofyourchoice.Avaluebetween5000Kand10500Kcanbesetin100Kunits.

NOTE:When[PRESENTATION]or[HIGH-BRIGHT]isselectedin[REFERENCE],thisfunctionisnotavailable.

AdjustingBrightnessandContrast[DYNAMICCONTRAST]If[ON]isselected,themostoptimalcontrastratioisusedaccordingtothepicture.

NOTE:• Dependingontheconditions,projectorsettingssuchas[DYNAMICCONTRAST]maynotbeabletobeselected.

[BrilliantColor]Selectsthebrightnessofthecolorwhite.Selectingoptionsfrom[MEDIUM]to[HIGH]increasesthebrightnessofthecolorwhite.

NOTE:• Ifunder[REFERENCE],[HIGH-BRIGHT]or[PRESENTATION]areselected,[BrilliantColor]cannotbechanged.

SelectingStillImageModeorMovieMode[IMAGEMODE]Thisfunctionallowsyoutoselectthestillimagemodeorthemoviemode.

STILL ��������������������� This mode is for a still image�MOVIE ������������������� This mode is for a movie�

NOTE:• Thismodemaynotbeavailabledependingoninputsignal.

AdjustingWhiteBalance[WHITEBALANCE]Thisallowsyoutoadjustthewhitebalance.Contrastforeachcolor(RGB)toadjustthewhitelevelofthescreen;Brightnessforeachcolor(RGB)isusedtoadjusttheblacklevelofthescreen.

[COLORCORRECTION]Correctsthecolorforallsignals.Adjuststhetoneforthecolorsred,green,blue,yellow,magentaandcyan.

RED HUE +Direction Magentadirection−Direction Yellowdirection

SATURATION +Direction Vivid−Direction Weak

GREEN HUE +Direction Yellowdirection−Direction Cyandirection

SATURATION +Direction Vivid−Direction Weak

BLUE HUE +Direction Cyandirection−Direction Magentadirection

SATURATION +Direction Vivid−Direction Weak

YELLOW HUE +Direction Reddirection−Direction Greendirection

SATURATION +Direction Vivid−Direction Weak

MAGENTA HUE +Direction Bluedirection−Direction Reddirection

SATURATION +Direction Vivid−Direction Weak

CYAN HUE +Direction Greendirection−Direction Bluedirection

SATURATION +Direction Vivid−Direction Weak

Page 90: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

77

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[CONTRAST]Adjuststheintensityoftheimageaccordingtotheincomingsignal.

[BRIGHTNESS]Adjuststhebrightnesslevelorthebackrasterintensity.

[SHARPNESS]Controlsthedetailoftheimage.

[COLOR]Increasesordecreasesthecolorsaturationlevel.

[HUE]Variesthecolorlevelfrom+/−greento+/−blue.Theredlevelisusedasreference.

Inputsignal CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS SHARPNESS COLOR HUERGBsystemof“COMPUTER/Display-Port/HDMI/HDBaseT”

Yes Yes Yes No No

COMPONENTsystemof“COMPUTER/DisplayPort/HDMI/HDBaseT”

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

CompositeVideo/S-Video Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes=Adjustable,No=Notadjustable

NOTE:• When[TESTPATTERN]isdisplayed,[CONTRAST],[BRIGHTNESS],[SHARPNESS],[COLOR]and[HUE]cannotbeadjusted.

[RESET]Thesettingsandadjustmentsfor[PICTURE]willbereturnedtothefactorysettingswiththeexceptionofthefollowing;Presetnumbersand[REFERENCE]withinthe[PRESET]screen.Thesettingsandadjustmentsunder[DETAILSETTINGS]withinthe[PRESET]screenthatarenotcurrentlyselectedwillnotbereset.

Page 91: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

78

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[IMAGE OPTIONS]

AdjustingClockandPhase[CLOCK/PHASE]ThisallowsyoutomanuallyadjustCLOCKandPHASE.

CLOCK ������������������� Use this item to fine tune the computer image or to remove any vertical banding that might appear� This function adjusts the clock frequencies that eliminate the horizontal banding in the image�This adjustment may be necessary when you connect your computer for the first time�

PHASE ������������������� Use this item to adjust the clock phase or to reduce video noise, dot interference or cross talk� (This is evident when part of your image appears to be shimmering�)Use [PHASE] only after the [CLOCK] is complete�

NOTE:The[CLOCK]and[PHASE]itemsareavailableforRGBsignalsonly.

Page 92: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

79

5. Using On-Screen Menu

AdjustingHorizontal/VerticalPosition[HORIZONTAL/VERTICAL]Adjuststheimagelocationhorizontallyandvertically.

• Animagecanbedistortedduringtheadjustmentof[CLOCK]and[PHASE].Thisisnotmalfunction.

• Theadjustmentsfor[CLOCK],[PHASE],[HORIZONTAL],and[VERTICAL]willbestoredinmemoryforthecur-rentsignal.Thenexttimeyouprojectthesignalwiththesameresolution,horizontalandverticalfrequency,itsadjustmentswillbecalledupandapplied.

Todeleteadjustmentsstoredinmemory,fromthemenu,youselect[RESET]→[CURRENTSIGNAL]andresettheadjustments.

[BLANKING]Adjuststhedisplayrange(blanking)atthetop,bottom,leftandrightedgesoftheinputsignal.

SelectingOverscanPercentage[OVERSCAN]Selectoverscanpercentage(Auto,0%,5%and10%)forsignal.

Projectedimage

Overscanedby10%

NOTE: • The[OVERSCAN]itemisnotavailable: -when[NATIVE]isselectedfor[ASPECTRATIO].

Page 93: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

80

5. Using On-Screen Menu

SelectingtheAspectRatio[ASPECTRATIO]Usethisfunctiontoselectthescreen’svertical:horizontalaspectratio.Selectthescreentype(4:3screen,16:9screenor16:10screen)atthescreensettingbeforesettingtheaspectratio.(→page97)Theprojectorautomaticallyidentifiesthesignalbeinginputandsetstheoptimumaspectratio.

For Computer signal

ForComponent/Video/S-Videosignals

Whenthescreentypeissetto4:3 Whenthescreentypeissetto16:9or16:10

Resolution AspectRatioVGA 640×480 4:3SVGA 800×600 4:3XGA 1024×768 4:3WXGA 1280×768 15:9WXGA 1280×800 16:10HD(FWXGA) 1366×768 approx.16:9WXGA+ 1440×900 16:10SXGA 1280×1024 5:4SXGA+ 1400×1050 4:3WXGA++ 1600×900 16:9UXGA 1600×1200 4:3WSXGA+ 1680×1050 16:10FHD(1080P) 1920×1080 16:9WUXGA 1920×1200 16:10WQXGA 2560×1600 16:10

Options Function

AUTO Theprojectorwillautomaticallydeterminetheincomingsignalanddisplayitinitsaspectratio.Theprojectormayerroneouslydeterminetheaspectratiodependingonitssignal.Ifthisoccurs,selecttheappropriateaspectratiofromthefollowing.

4:3 Theimageisdisplayedin4:3aspectratio.

5:4 Theimageisdisplayedin5:4aspectratio

16:9 Theimageisdisplayedin16:9aspectratio

15:9 Theimageisdisplayedin15:9aspectratio

16:10 Theimageisdisplayedin16:10aspectratio

Page 94: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

81

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Options Function

NATIVE Theprojectordisplaysthecurrentimageinitstrueresolutionwhentheincomingcomputersignalhasalowerorhigherresolutionthantheprojector’snativeresolution.(→page2)Whentheincomingcomputersignalhasahigherresolutionthantheprojector'snativeresolution,thecenterofanimagewillbedisplayed.

LETTERBOX Theimageofaletterboxsignal(16:9)isstretchedequallyinthehorizontalandverticaldirectionstofitthescreen.

WIDESCREEN Theimageofasqueezesignal(16:9)isstretchedleftandrightin16:9.

ZOOM Theimageofasqueezesignal(16:9)isstretchedleftandrightin4:3.Partsofthedisplayedimagearecroppedattheleftandrightedgesandthereforenotvisible.

FULL Projecttofullscreensize.

TIP:• Imagepositioncanbeadjustedverticallyusing[POSITION]whenthe[16:9],[15:9],or[16:10]aspectratiosareselected.• Theterm“letterbox”referstoamorelandscape-orientedimagewhencomparedtoa4:3image,whichisthestandardaspect

ratio for a vide source. Theletterboxsignalhasaspectratioswiththevistasize“1.85:1”orcinemascopesize“2.35:1”formoviefilm.• Theterm“squeeze”referstothecompressedimageofwhichaspectratioisconvertedfrom16:9to4:3.

[INPUTRESOLUTION]TheresolutionisassignedautomaticallywhentheresolutionoftheinputsignalfromthecomputervideoinputterminalorBNCvideoinputterminal(analogRGB)cannotbedistinguished.

Page 95: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

82

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[VIDEO]

UsingNoiseReduction[NOISEREDUCTION]Whenprojectingavideoimage,youcanusethe[NOISEREDUCTION]functiontoreducethescreennoise(roughnessanddistortion).Thisdeviceisequippedwiththreetypesofnoisereductionfunctions.Selectthefunctionaccordingtothetypeofnoise.Dependingonthenoiselevel,thenoisereductioneffectcanbesetto[OFF],[LOW],[MEDIUM]or[HIGH].[NOISEREDUCTION]canbeselectedforSDTV,HDTVsignalandcomponentsignalinput.

RANDOM NR ��������� Reduces flickering random noise in an image� MOSQUITO NR ������ Reduces mosquito noise that appears around the edges of an image during Blu-ray playback�BLOCK NR ������������� Reduces block noise or mosaic-like patterns by selecting ON�

SelectingInterlacedProgressiveConversionProcessMode[DEINTERLACE]Thisfunctionallowsyoutoselectaninterlaced-to-progressiveconversionprocessforvideosignals.

NORMAL ���������������� Automatically distinguishes a moving image from a static image to create a distinct image� Please select [MOVIE] if there are any obvious jitter and noises�

MOVIE ������������������� Select when projecting moving images� This is suitable for signals with a lot of jitter and noise�STILL ��������������������� Select when projecting static images� The video will flicker when a moving image is projected�

NOTE:ThisfunctionisnotavailablewithRGBsignals.

[CONTRASTENHANCEMENT]Usingthecharacteristicsofthehumaneye,apicturequalitywithasenseofcontrastandresolutionisachieved.

OFF ������������������������ Suite vision is switched off�AUTO ��������������������� Contrast and picture quality are automatically improved using the suite vision function�NORMAL ���������������� Adjust the gain manually�

Page 96: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

83

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[SIGNALTYPE]SelectionofRGBandcomponentsignals.Normally,thisissetto[AUTO].Pleasechangethesettingifthecoloroftheimageremainsunnatural.

AUTO ��������������������� Automatically distinguishes RGB and component signals�RGB ����������������������� Switches to the RGB input�COMPONENT ��������� Switches to the component signal input�

[VIDEOLEVEL]SelectionofthevideosignallevelwhenconnectinganexternaldevicetotheHDMIINterminal,DisplayPort inputterminal,andHDBaseTinputterminaloftheprojector.

AUTO ��������������������� The video level is switched automatically based on the information from the device outputting the signal�Depending on the connected device, this setting may not be made properly� In this case, switch to [NORMAL” or “ENHANCED” from the menu and view with the optimum setting�

NORMAL ���������������� This disables the enhanced mode�ENHANCED ������������ This improves the image’s contrast, expressing the dark and light sections more dynamically�SUPER WHITE ������� The video contrast is improved and the dark areas appear more dynamic�

Page 97: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

84

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[3D SETTINGS]

Pleasereferto“3-9Projecting3Dvideos”(→page38)fortheoperation.

FORMATSelectthe3Dvideoformat(recording/transmissionformat).Selecttomatchthe3Dbroadcastand3Dmedia.Nor-mally,[AUTO]isselected.Pleaseselectthe3Dinputsignalformatwhenthe3Ddetectionsignaloftheformatcannotbedistinguished.

L/RINVERTInvertthedisplayorderoftheleftandrightvideos.Select[ON]ifyoufeeluncomfortablewiththe3Ddisplaywhen[OFF]isselected.

Page 98: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

85

5. Using On-Screen Menu

❻ Menu Descriptions & Functions [DISPLAY][PIP/PICTURE BY PICTURE]

SUBINPUTSelecttheinputsignaltobedisplayedinthesub-display.Pleasereferto“4-2DisplayingTwoPicturesattheSameTime”(→page52)fordetailsontheoperation.

MODESelecteitherPIPorPICTUREBYPICTUREwhenswitchingto2-screendisplay.

PICTURESWAPThevideosinthemaindisplayandsub-displaywillbeswitched.Pleasereferto“4-2DisplayingTwoPicturesattheSameTime”(→page54)fordetails.

PIPSETTINGSelectthedisplayposition,positionadjustmentandsizeofthesub-displayinthePIPscreen.

START POSITION ��� Selection of the display position of the sub-display when switching to the PIP screen�HORIZONTAL POSITION ������������������������������ Adjust the display position of the sub-display in the horizontal direction� The respective corners will serve

as reference points�VERTICAL POSITION ������������������������������ Adjust the display position of the sub-display in the vertical direction� The respective corners will serve as

reference points�SIZE ����������������������� Select the display size of the sub-display�

Page 99: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

86

5. Using On-Screen Menu

TIP:Thehorizontalpositionandverticalpositionaretheamountofmovementfromthereferencepoints.Forexample,whenTOP-LEFTis adjusted, the position is displayed with the same amount of movement even if displayed with other starting positions.The maximum amount of movement is half the resolution of the projector.

ReferencepointAdjustusingthehorizon-talposition

Sub-display Maindisplay

Referencepoint

Adjustusingtheverticalposition

TOP-LEFT TOP-RIGHT

BOTTOM-LEFT BOTTOM-RIGHT

ReferencepointReferencepoint

BORDERSelectthedisplayboundaryofthemaindisplayandsub-displayofthe[PICTUREBYPICTURE]screen.

Displayboundary

Maindisplay Sub-displayMaindisplay Sub-display MaindisplaySub-display

TIP:• 6stepscanbeselectedonthisprojector.

Page 100: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

87

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[GEOMETRIC CORRECTION]

KEYSTONEDisplaythetrapezoidcorrectionscreenandadjustthetrapezoidaldistortionoftheprojectionscreen.Todisplaythe[KEYSTONE]screen,select→[DISPLAY]→[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]→[KEYSTONE]intheon-screenmenu.The [GEOMETRICCORRECTION]screencanalsobedisplayedbypressing the3DREFORMbuttonontheremotecontrol.

HORIZONTAL ��������� Adjustments when projecting from a diagonal direction to the screen�

VERTICAL �������������� Adjustments when projecting from the top or bottom direction to the screen�

TILT ����������������������� Adjusts the distortion when performing trapezoidal correction with the screen moved in the vertical direction using the lens shift�

THROW RATIO ������� Adjusts according to the projection ratio of the optional lens used�

Modelnameoflensunit

Adjustmentrange

NP34ZL 9–13NP35ZL 12–17NP36ZL 12–17NP37ZL 15–31

NOTE:• Whenpowerissuppliedtothedevice,theadjustmentvalueofthe[KEYSTONE]usedpreviouslyisretainedevenifthegradient

of the device is changed.• Whenclearingtheadjustmentvalueof[KEYSTONE],pressthe3DREFORMbuttonfor2ormoreseconds.• Whensettingother[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]functions,the[KEYSTONE]menucannotbeselected.Whenperformingtrapezoidalcorrection,pressthe3DREFORMbuttonfor2ormoresecondstocleartheadjustmentvalueof[GEOMETRICCORRECTION].

• Aselectricalcorrection iscarriedoutby [KEYSTONE], thebrightnessmaybe reducedor thescreenqualitymaydeterioratesometimes.

Page 101: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

88

5. Using On-Screen Menu

CORNERSTONEDisplaythe4-pointcorrectionscreenandadjustthetrapezoidaldistortionoftheprojectionscreen.Pleasereferto“CorrectingHorizontalandVerticalKeystoneDistortion[CORNERSTONE]”(→page32)fordetailsontheoperation.

HORIZONTALCORNER/VERTICALCORNERDistortioncorrectionforcornerprojectionsuchaswallsurfaces.

HORIZONTAL CORNER ������������������������������ Performs correction for projection onto a wall lying at an angle to the horizontal direction�

* Reverse angle correction is also possible�VERTICAL CORNER ������������������������������ Performs correction for projection onto a wall lying at an angle to the vertical direction�

* Reverse angle correction is also possible�

NOTE:• Whenthemaximumadjustmentrangeisexceeded,distortionadjustmentisdisabled.Setuptheprojectoratanoptimalangleas

the deterioration in the image quality increases as the distortion adjustment volume gets larger.• Pleasenotethattheimagewillgooutoffocusduetothedifferenceinthedistancebetweentheupperandlowerorleftandrightsidesandthecenterofthescreenforprojectionscuttingacrosscorners.Lenseswithshortfocalpointsarealsonotrecommendedfor projections cutting across corners as the image will go out of focus.

Page 102: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

89

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Adjustment method1. Alignthecursorwiththe[HORIZONTALCORNER]or[VERTICALCORNER]ofthe[GEOMETRICCORREC-

TION]menuandthenpresstheENTERbutton.

• Theadjustmentscreenwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ▼▲◀▶ buttons to align the cursor (yellow box) with the target adjustment point and then press the ENTER button.

• Thecursorwillchangeintoanadjustmentpoint(yellowincolor).

3. Press the ▼▲◀▶buttonstoadjustthecornersorsidesofthescreenandthenpresstheENTERbutton.• Theadjustmentpointwillgobacktobeingacursor(yellowbox).

Explanationofscreentransition

• Theadjustmentpointsofthefourcorners(a,c,fandhinthedrawing)willmoveindependently.

• Thefollowingadjustmentpointsdifferatthe[HORIZONTALCORNER]and[VERTICALCORNER].

HORIZONTALCORNER:WhenPointbinthedrawingismoved,andtheuppersideandPointgaremoved,thelowersidewillmoveinaparallelmanner.

VERTICALCORNER:WhenPointdinthedrawingismoved,andtheleftsideandPointearemoved,therightsidewillmoveinaparallelmanner.

[Adjustmentpointsofthe[HORIZONTALCORNER]screenandmovementpointsoftheprojectionscreen]

a

b

b c

d e

f g h

a c

d e

fg

h

PointbwillbedisplacedinaparallelmanneratthesametimeasPointsa,b,c

PointgwillbedisplacedinaparallelmanneratthesametimeasPointsf,g,h

[Adjustmentpointsofthe[VERTICALCORNER]screenandmovementpointsoftheprojectionscreen]

a

a

b

bc

cd

dee

f

f

g

gh

h

PointdwillbedisplacedinaparallelmanneratthesametimeasPointsa,d,f

PointewillbedisplacedinaparallelmanneratthesametimeasPointsf,g,h

4. StartfromStep2onwardstoadjusttheotherpoints.

5. When the adjustment is completed, press the ▼▲◀▶buttonstoalignthecursorwiththe[EXIT]intheadjust-ment screen and then press theENTER button.

• Switchtothe[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]menuscreen.

Page 103: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

90

5. Using On-Screen Menu

PINCUSHIONAdjustthecurvedistortionoftheprojectionscreen.

TOP ������������������������ Adjust the curve distortion of the upper edge of the projection screen�

BOTTOM ���������������� Adjust the curve distortion of the lower edge of the projection screen�

LEFT ���������������������� Adjust the curve distortion of the left edge of the projection screen�RIGHT �������������������� Adjust the curve distortion of the right edge of the projection

screen�

TOP

LEFT RIGHT

BOTTOM

PCTOOL(Forfuturesupport)Recallthegeometriccorrectiondatathatisregisteredintheprojectorbeforehand.Therearethreetypesofregistereddata.

NOTE:• KEYSTONE,CORNERSTONE,andPINCUSHIONcannotbeselectedwhensettingthegeometriccorrectionusingaPCtool.• Toclearthe[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]datathathasbeensetup,pressthe3DREFORMbuttonfor2ormoreseconds.• Aselectricalcorrectioniscarriedout ingeometriccorrection,thebrightnessmaybeaffectedandthepicturequalitymaybe

degraded.

RESETResettheadjustmentvaluethathasbeensetupinGEOMETRICCORRECTION(returntotheinitialvalue).

Page 104: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

91

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[EDGE BLENDING]

Thisadjuststheedges(boundaries)oftheprojectionscreenwhenprojectinghighresolutionvideosusingacombina-tionofseveralprojectorsintheup,down,leftandrightpositions.

MODEThisenablesordisablestheEDGEBLENDINGfunction.WhenMODEissettoON,theTOP,BOTTOM,LEFT,RIGHTandBLACKLEVELsettingscanbeadjusted.

TOP/BOTTOM/LEFT/RIGHTThisselectstheEDGEBLENDINGlocationsontheleft,right,topandbottomonthescreen.Thefollowingsettingscanbeadjustedwhenanitemisselected.(→page57)

CONTROL �������������� Enable TOP, BOTTOM, LEFT and RIGHT functions�MARKER ���������������� Set whether to display marker or not when adjusting the range and display position� When turned on, a

magenta marker for adjusting the range adjustment and a green marker for adjusting the display position will be displayed�

RANGE ������������������� Adjust the range (width) of the edge blending�POSITION �������������� Adjust the display position of the edge blending�

BLACKLEVELDividethescreenintoninepartsandkeeptheblackleveluniformforeachprojector.TheninedivisionsscreensareTOP-LEFT,TOP-CENTER,TOP-RIGHT,CENTER-LEFT,CENTER,CENTER-RIGHT,BOTTOM-LEFT,BOTTOM-CENTERandBOTTOM-RIGHT.(→page60)

Page 105: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

92

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[MULTI SCREEN]

WHITEBALANCEThisadjuststhewhitebalanceforeachprojectorwhenprojectingusingacombinationofseveralprojectors.Thiscanbeadjustedwhen[MODE]issetto[ON].

BRIGHTNESS W, BRIGHTNESS R, BRIGHTNESS G, BRIGHTNESS B ������������������������������ Adjusting the black color of the video�CONTRAST W, CONTRAST R, CONTRAST G, CONTRAST B ������������������������������ Adjusting the white color of the video�

PICTURESETTINGThissetsthedivisionconditionwhenprojectingusingacombinationofseveralprojectors.Pleasereferto“4.Multi-ScreenProjection”(→page48)fordetails.

MODE OFF Usetheprojectorinastandalonestate.

ZOOM Thisadjuststhepositionandwidthofthevideoareathatyouwishtodivide.Theedgeblendingwidthwillalsobeautomaticallysettothatwidth.

TILING Thisassignsthedividedscreenstotheprojectors.Theedgeblendingfunctionwillalsobesetautomatically.

ZOOM HORIZONTALZOOM

Thismaginifiesthevideoareainthehorizontaldirection.

VERTICALZOOM

Thismaginifiesthevideoareaintheverticaldirection.

HORIZONTALPOSITION

Thisshiftsthevideoareainthehorizontaldirection.

VERTICALPOSI-TION

Thisshiftsthevideoareaintheverticaldirection.

TILING WIDTH Thisselectsthenumberofprojectorstobearrangedhorizontally.

HEIGHT Thisselectsthenumberofprojectorstobearrangedvertically.

HORIZONTALPOSITION

Thisselectsthepositionoftheprojectorstartingfromtheleftamongthosearrangedhorizontally.

VERTICALPOSI-TION

Thisselectsthepositionoftheprojectorstartingfromthetopamongthosearrangedvertically.

Page 106: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

93

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Conditions for using tiling• Alltheprojectorsneedtofulfilthefollowingconditions.• Thepanelsizemustbethesame• Theprojectionscreensizemustbethesame• Theleftandrightendsortopandbottomendsoftheprojectionscreenmustbeconsistent.• Thesettingsfortheleftandrightedgesoftheedgeblendingarethesame• Thesettingsforthetopandbottomedgesoftheedgeblendingarethesame

Ifthetilingconditionsaresatisfied,thevideoscreenoftheprojectorateachinstallationpositionwillbeautomaticallyextractedandprojected.

Ifthetilingconditionsarenotsatisfied,adjustthevideoscreenoftheprojectorateachinstallationpositionusingthezoomfunction.

• AssignauniquecontrolIDtoeachprojector.• Setthe“ColorSetting”and“DeepColorSetting”onyourBlu-rayplayerorcomputerto“Auto”.Refertotheowner’smanualaccompanyingyourBlu-rayplayerorcomputerformoreinformation.

ConnecttheHDMIoutputofyourBlu-rayplayerorcomputertothefirstprojector.ThenconnecttotheHDMIINinputterminalofthesecondandsubsequenttiledprojectors.

Tilingsettingexample)Numberofhorizontalunits=2,Numberofverticalunits=2

Horizontalorder=SecondunitVerticalorder=Firstunit

Page 107: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

94

5. Using On-Screen Menu

❼ Menu Descriptions & Functions [SETUP]

[MENU]

SelectingMenuLanguage[LANGUAGE]Youcanchooseoneof29languagesforon-screeninstructions.

NOTE:Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

SelectingMenuColor[COLORSELECT]Youcanchoosebetweentwooptionsformenucolor:COLORandMONOCHROME.

TurningOn/OffSourceDisplay[INPUTDISPLAY]ThisoptionturnsonoroffinputnamedisplaysuchasHDMI,DisplayPort,BNC,BNC(CV),BNC(Y/C),COMPUTER,HDBaseTtobedisplayedonthetoprightofthescreen.

Turningmessagesonandoff[MESSAGEDISPLAY]Thisoptionselectswhetherornottodisplayprojectormessagesatthebottomoftheprojectedimage.Evenwhen“OFF”isselected,thesecuritylockwarningisdisplayed.Thesecuritylockwarningturnsoffwhenthesecuritylockiscanceled.

TurningON/OFFControlID[IDDISPLAY]ID DISPLAY ����������� This option turns on or off the ID number which is displayed when the ID SET button on the remote control

is pressed� (→ page 105)

Page 108: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

95

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[3DCAUTIONMESSAGE]Thisselectswhethertodisplayacautionmessageornotwhenswitchingtoa3Dvideo.ThedefaultconditionwhenshippedfromthefactoryisON.

OFF ������������������������ The 3D caution message screen will not be displayed�ON ������������������������� The 3D caution message screen will be displayed when switching to a 3D video� Press the ENTER button

to cancel the message�• Themessagewilldisappearautomaticallyafter60secondsorwhenotherbuttonsarepressed.Ifitdisap-

pears automatically, the 3D caution message will be displayed again when switching to a 3D video�

SelectingMenuDisplayTime[DISPLAYTIME]Thisoptionallowsyoutoselecthowlongtheprojectorwaitsafterthelasttouchofabuttontoturnoffthemenu.Thepresetchoicesare[MANUAL],[AUTO5SEC],[AUTO15SEC],and[AUTO45SEC].The[AUTO45SEC]isthefac-torypreset.

Page 109: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

96

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[INSTALLATION]

SelectingProjectorOrientation[ORIENTATION]Thisreorientsyourimageforyourtypeofprojection.Theoptionsare:desktopfrontprojection,ceilingrearprojection,desktoprearprojection,andceilingfrontprojection.

NOTE: • Pleaseconsultthedealerifyourequirespecialinstallationservicese.g.whenmountingtheprojectortoaceiling.Neverinstall

the projector on your own. This may result in the projector falling down and causing injury to people.

AUTO ��������������������� This automatically detects and projects the DESKTOP FRONT and CEILING FRONT�

NOTE:• TheDESKTOPREARandCEILINGREARwillnotbedetected.Pleaseselectmanually.

DESKTOPFRONT CEILINGREAR

DESKTOPREAR CEILINGFRONT

TIP:• CheckwhethertheautomaticDESKTOPFRONTisinstalledwithin±10degreesforfloorinstallationandwhethertheCEILINGFRONTiswithin±10degreesforceilinginstallation.Selectmanuallywhentheprojectionscreenisinverted.

Page 110: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

97

5. Using On-Screen Menu

SelectingAspectRatioandPositionforScreen[SCREENTYPE]

Screentype Setstheaspectratiooftheprojectionscreen.

FREE Theratioofthepanelisselected.Selectthiswhenprojectingmulti-screenand17:9screen(2K).

4:3screen Forascreenwitha4:3aspectratio

16:9screen Forascreenwitha16:9aspectratio

16:10screen Forascreenwitha16:10aspectratio

NOTE:• Afterchangingthescreentype,checkthesettingof[ASPECTRATIO]inthemenu.(→ page 80)

UsingtheWallColorCorrection[WALLCOLOR]

Thisfunctionallowsforquickadaptivecolorcorrectioninapplicationswherethescreenmaterialisnotwhite.

SelectingFanMode[FANMODE]FanModeisusedtosetthespeedoftheinternalcoolingfan.

MODE �������������������� Select three modes for fan speed: AUTO and HIGH�AUTO: The built-in fans automatically run at a variable speed according to the internal temperature�HIGH: The built-in fans run at a high speed� Select this option when using the projector at altitudes ap-proximately 2500 feet/760 meters or higher�

NOTE: • Makesurethespeedissetto[HIGH]whenyouareusingthisdevicecontinuouslyforseveraldays.• Set[FANMODE]to[HIGH]whenusingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately2500feet/760metersorhigher.• Usingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately2500feet/760metersorhigherwithoutsettingto[HIGH]cancausetheprojectortooverheatandtheprotectorcouldshutdown.Ifthishappens,waitacoupleminutesandturnontheprojector.

• Usingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately2500feet/760metersorhighercanshortenthelifeofopticalcomponentssuchasthe light module.

• Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

TIP:• When[HIGH]isselectedfor[FANMODE],asymbolicon will be displayed at the bottom of the menu.

Page 111: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

98

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[LIGHTMODE]Adjustingtheenergysavingssettingsandthebrightnessofeachprojectorinmulti-screenprojection.Forenergysavingssettings,seepage29“3-6.ChangingLIGHTMODE/CheckingEnergy-SavingEffectUsingLIGHTMODE[LIGHTMODE]”.

LIGHTMODE NORMAL Thelightmoduleluminance(brightness)willbecome100%andthescreenwillturnbright.

ECO1 Bycontrollingthebrightnessandfanspeedaccordingtotheselectedsetting,energycanbesavedandmotionnoiseandthepowerconsumptioncanbelowered.Canbeselectedwhen[CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS]modeissetto[OFF].

ECO2

CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS

OFF [CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS]modewillbecanceled.

ON Maintainsthebrightnessthatisineffectatthetime[ON]isselected.Unless[OFF]isse-lected,thesamesettingswillremainineffectevenwhentheprojectoristurnedoff.• Tore-adjustthebrightness,firstturnthissettingOFFbeforemakingfurtheradjustments.

NOTE:• [CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS]modeisafunctionusedtomaintainthebrightnessataconstantlevel.Colorwillnotbefixed.

ADJUST Brightnesscanbeadjustedin1%incrementsfrom20to100%.Whenseveralprojectorsareusedformulti-screenprojection,thebrightnesscanbead-justedindividuallyoneachprojector.Theadjustmentiseffectivewhen[NORMAL][LIGHTMODE]isselectedand[CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS]modeisturned[OFF].

TIP:• Brightnessnormallydecreaseswithuse,butbyselecting[CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS]mode,sensorsinsidetheprojectordetect

brightness and automatically adjust the output, thereby maintaining a constant brightness throughout the life of the light module. However,ifoutputisalreadyatitsmaximum,brightnesswilldecreasewithuse. Forthisreason,whenusingmulti-screenprojection,itisrecommendedtoadjustthebrightnesstoaslightlylowerlevel,thensettingthe[CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS]modeto[ON].

[REF.WHITEBALANCE]Thisfeatureallowsyoutoadjustthewhitebalanceforallsignals.Thewhiteandblacklevelsofthesignalareadjustedforoptimumcolorreproduction.

CONTRAST R/CONTRAST G/CONTRAST B ������������������������������ These adjust the picture’s white color�BRIGHTNESS R/BRIGHTNESS G/BRIGHTNESS B ������������������������������ These adjust the picture’s black color�

3D GLASSESSelect3Dglassesmethod.

DLP® Link ������������� Select when using DLP® Link type 3D glasses�OTHERS ����������������� Select when using a non 3D emitter type glasses� It is required to connect the 3D emitter to the 3D SYNC

terminal of this projector� Please refer to page 40 about recommended items of 3D glasses and 3D emitter for this projector�

Page 112: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

99

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[CONTROL]

TOOLS

ADMINISTRATORMODEThisallowsyoutoselectMENUMODE,savesettings,andsetapasswordfortheadministratormode.

MENUMODE Selecteither[BASIC]or[ADVANCED]menu.(→page64)

NOTSAVESETTINGVALUES

Placing a check mark will not save your projector settings�Clear this check box to save your projector settings�

NEWPASSWORD/CONFIRMPASS-WORD

Assignapasswordfortheadministratormode. Upto10alphanumericcharacters

Page 113: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

100

5. Using On-Screen Menu

PROGRAMTIMER

Thisoption turnson/standby theprojectorandchangesvideosignals,andselectsECOmodeautomaticallyataspecifiedtime.

NOTE:• Beforeusing[PROGRAMTIMER],makesurethatthe[DATEANDTIME]featureisset.(→ page 103) MakesurethattheprojectorisinthestandbyconditionwiththePOWERcordconnected. Theprojectorhasabuilt-inclock.Theclockwillkeepworkingforabouttwoweeksafterthemainpoweristurnedoff.Ifthemainpowerisnotsuppliedtotheprojectorfortwoweeksormore,itrequirestoset[DATEANDTIMESETTINGS]featureagain.

Setting a new program timer1. On the PROGRAM TIMER screen, use the ▲ or ▼buttontoselect[SETTINGS]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The[PROGRAMLIST]screenwillbedisplayed.

2. Select a blank program number and press the ENTER button.

The[EDIT]screenwillbedisplayed.

3. Makesettingsforeachitemasrequired.

ACTIVE ������������������ Place a check mark to enable the program�DAY ������������������������ Select days of the week for the program timer� To execute the program from Monday to Friday, select [MON-

FRI]� To execute the program in everyday basis, select [EVERYDAY]�

Page 114: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

101

5. Using On-Screen Menu

TIME ���������������������� Set the time to execute the program� Enter time in 24-hour format�FUNCTION ������������� Select a function to be executed� Selecting [POWER] will allow you to turn on or off the projector by setting

[ADVANCED SETTINGS]� Selecting [INPUT] will allow you to select a video source by setting [ADVANCED SETTINGS]� Selecting [LIGHT MODE] will allow you to select [LIGHT MODE] by setting [ADVANCED SET-TINGS]�

ADVANCED SETTINGS ������������������������������ Select power on/off, a type of video source, or LIGHT MODE for the selected item in [FUNCTION]�REPEAT ������������������ Place a check mark to repeat the program continuing basis� To use the program this week only, clear the

check mark�4. Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Thiswillcompletethesettings.

Youwillbereturnedtothe[PROGRAMLIST]screen.

5. Select[BACK]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Youwillbereturnedtothe[PROGRAMTIMER]screen.

6. Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Youwillbereturnedtothe[TOOLS]screen.

NOTE:• Upto30differenttimersettingscanbeprogrammed.• When[PROGRAMTIMER]isturnedon,the[STANDBYMODE]settingisignored.• TheProgramTimerisexecutedonasettimebasis,notinaprogrambasis.• Oncetheprogramnotmarkedwithacheckin[REPEAT]hasbeenexecuted,thecheckmarkinthe[ACTIVE]checkboxwillbe

cleared automatically and the program will be disabled.• Whentheon-timeandtheoff-timesetforthesametime,theoff-timesettingwilltakepreference.• Twodifferentsourcesaresetforthesametime,thelargerprogramnumberwilltakepreference.• Theon-timesettingwillnotbeexecutedwhilethecoolingfansarerunningoranerrorisoccurring.• Iftheoff-timesettingisexpiredundertheconditioninwhichthepoweroffisnotpossible,theoff-timersettingwillnotbeexecuted

until the power off becomes possible.• Programsnotmarkedwithacheckmarkin[ACTIVE]ofthe[EDIT]screenwillnotbeexecutedeveniftheProgramTimeris

enabled.• Whentheprojectoristurnedonbyusingtheprogramtimerandifyouwanttoturnofftheprojector,settheoff-timeordoit

manually so as not to leave the projector on for a long period of time.

Page 115: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

102

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Activating the program timer

1. Select[ENABLE]onthe[PROGRAMTIMER]screenandpresstheENTERbutton.

Theselectionscreenwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ▼buttontoalignthecursorwith[ON]andthenpresstheENTERbutton. Returntothe[PROGRAMTIMER]screen.

NOTE:• Whentheeffectivesettingsofthe[PROGRAMTIMER]havenotbeensetto[ON],theprogramwillnotbeexecutedevenifthe[ACTIVE]itemsintheprogramlisthavebeenticked.

• Evenwhentheeffectivesettingsofthe[PROGRAMTIMER]aresetto[ON],the[PROGRAMTIMER]willnotworkuntilthe[PRO-GRAMTIMER]screenisclosed.

Changing the programmed settings

1. Onthe[PROGRAMLIST]screen,selectaprogramyouwanttoeditandpresstheENTERbutton.

2. Changethesettingsonthe[EDIT]screen.

3. Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Theprogrammedsettingswillbechanged.

Youwillbereturnedtothe[PROGRAMLIST]screen.

Changing the order of programs

1. Onthe[PROGRAMLIST]screen,selectaprogramwhoseorderyouwanttochangeandpressthe▶ button.

2. Press the ▼ button to select ▲ or ▼.

3. PresstheENTERbuttonafewtimestoselectarowtowhichyouwishtomovetheprogram.

Theorderoftheprogramswillbechanged.

Deleting the programs

1. Onthe[PROGRAMLIST]screen,selectaprogramnumberyouwanttodeleteandpressthe▶ button.

2. Press the ▼buttontoselect[DELETE].3. Press the ENTER button.

Theconfirmationscreenwillbedisplayed.

4. Select[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Theprogramwillbedeleted.

Thiswillcompletedeletingtheprogram.

Page 116: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

103

5. Using On-Screen Menu

DATEANDTIMESETTINGS

Youcansetthecurrenttime,month,date,andyear.NOTE:Theprojectorhasabuilt-inclock.Theclockwillkeepworkingforabout2weeksafterthemainpoweristurnedoff.Ifthemainpowerisofffor2weeksormore,thebuilt-inclockwillcease.Ifthebuilt-inclockceases,setthedateandtimeagain.Thebuilt-in clock will not cease while in the standby mode.

TIME ZONE SETTINGS �������������� Select your time zone�DATE AND TIME SETTINGS ������ Set your current date (MM/DD/YYYY) and time (HH:MM)�

INTERNET TIME SERVER: If you place a check mark, the projector’s built-in clock will be syn-chronized with an Internet time server at the time of projector’s startup�UPDATE: Synchronizes the projector’s built-in clock immediately� The UPDATE button is not available unless the INTERNET TIME SERVER check box is turned on�

SUMMER TIME SETTINGS ������� If you place a check mark, the clock for daylight saving will be enabled�

[MOUSE]Thisfunctioncannotbeusedinthisdevice.Itisusedforfutureexpansionpurposesonly.

Page 117: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

104

5. Using On-Screen Menu

DisablingtheCabinetButtons[CONTROLPANELLOCK]ThisoptionturnsonorofftheCONTROLPANELLOCKfunction.

NOTE:• Howtocancelthe[CONTROLPANELLOCK] Whenthe[CONTROLPANELLOCK]issetto[ON],presstheSOURCEbuttononthemainbodyforabout10secondstocancelthe[CONTROLPANELLOCK].

TIP:• Whenthe[CONTROLPANELLOCK]isturnedon,akeylockicon[ ]willbedisplayedatthebottomrightofthemenu.• ThisCONTROLPANELLOCKdoesnotaffecttheremotecontrolfunctions.

EnablingSecurity[SECURITY]ThisfeatureturnsonorofftheSECURITYfunction.Unlessthecorrectkeywordisentered,theprojectorcannotprojectanimage.(→page35)

NOTE:Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

SelectingCommunicationSpeed[COMMUNICATIONSPEED]ThisfeaturesetsthebaudrateofthePCControlport(D-Sub9P).Itsupportsdataratesfrom4800to115200bps.Thedefaultis38400bps.Selecttheappropriatebaudrateforyourequipmenttobeconnected(dependingontheequipment,alowerbaudratemayberecommendedforlongcableruns).

NOTE:• Select[38400bps]orlesswhenusingthesuppliedsoftwareprograms.• Yourselectedcommunicationspeedwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

Page 118: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

105

5. Using On-Screen Menu

SettingIDtotheProjector[CONTROLID]YoucanoperatemultipleprojectorsseparatelyandindependentlywiththesingleremotecontrolthathastheCONTROLIDfunction.IfyouassignthesameIDtoalltheprojectors,youcanconvenientlyoperatealltheprojectorstogetherusingthesingleremotecontrol.Todoso,youhavetoassignanIDnumbertoeachprojector.

CONTROL ID NUMBER �������Select a number from 1 to 254 you wish to assign to your projector�CONTROL ID �����������������������Select [OFF] to turn off the CONTROL ID setting and select [ON] to turn on the CONTROL ID setting�

NOTE: • When[ON]isselectedfor[CONTROLID],theprojectorcannotbeoperatedbyusingtheremotecontrolthatdoesnotsupporttheCONTROLIDfunction.(Inthiscasethebuttonsontheprojectorcabinetcanbeused.)

• Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.• PressingandholdingtheENTERbuttonontheprojectorcabinetfor10secondswilldisplaythemenuforcancelingtheControlID.

Assigning or Changing the Control ID1. Turn on the projector.

2. Press the ID SET button on the remote control.

TheCONTROLIDscreenwillbedisplayed.

IftheprojectorcanbeoperatedwiththecurrentremotecontrolID,the[AC-TIVE]willbedisplayed.IftheprojectorcannotbeoperatedwiththecurrentremotecontrolID,the[INACTIVE]willbedisplayed.Tooperatetheinactiveprojector,assignthecontrolIDusedfortheprojectorbyusingthefollowingprocedure(Step3).

3. PressoneofnumerickeypadbuttonswhilepressingandholdingtheIDSET button on the remote control.

Example:

Toassign“3”,pressthe“3”buttonontheremotecontrol.

NoIDmeansthatalltheprojectorscanbeoperatedtogetherwithasingleremotecontrol.Toset“NoID”,enter“000”orpresstheCLEARbutton.

TIP:TherangeofIDsisfrom1to254.4. Release the ID SET button.

TheupdatedCONTROLIDscreenwillbedisplayed.

NOTE: • TheIDscanbeclearedinafewdaysafterthebatteriesarerundownorremoved.• Ifoneofbuttonsof theremotecontrolwithoutbatteries ispressedaccidentally,currentspecifiedIDwillbecleared.

Page 119: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

106

5. Using On-Screen Menu

TurningOnorOffRemoteSensor[REMOTESENSOR]Thisoptiondetermineswhichremotesensorontheprojectorisenabledinwirelessmode.Theoptionsare:FRONT/BACK,FRONT,BACK,andHDBaseT.

NOTE:• TheremotecontroloftheprojectorwillnotbeabletoreceivesignalsifthepowersupplyoftheHDBaseTtransmissiondeviceconnectedtotheprojectorisswitchedonwhenthishasbeensetto“HDBaseT”.

TIP:• Iftheremotecontrolsystemdoesnotfunctionwhendirectsunlightorstrongilluminationstrikestheremotecontrolsensorof

the projector, change another option.

Page 120: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

107

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[NETWORK SETTINGS]

Important:• Consultwithyournetworkadministratoraboutthesesettings.• WhenusingawiredLANconnection,connectaLANcable(Ethernetcable)totheLANport(RJ-45)oftheprojector.(→ page

133)

TIP:Thenetworksettingsyoumakewillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

Hints on How to Set Up LAN Connection

To set up the projector for a LAN connection:Select[WIREDLAN]→[PROFILES]→[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2].TwosettingscanbesetforwiredLAN.Nextturnonorofffor[DHCP],[IPADDRESS],[SUBNETMASK],and[GATEWAY]andselect[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.(→page108)To recall LAN settings stored in the profile number:Select[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2]forwiredLAN,andthenselect[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.(→page108)ToconnectaDHCPserver:Turnon[DHCP]forwiredLAN.Select[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton.TospecifyIPaddresswithoutusingtheDHCPserver,turnoff[DHCP].(→page108)

To receive error messages via e-mail:Select[ALERTMAIL],andset[SENDER'SADDRESS],[SMTPSERVERNAME],and[RECIPIENT'SADDRESS].Last,select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.(→page110)

Page 121: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

108

5. Using On-Screen Menu

WIRED LAN

PROFILES • Thesettingsforusingthebuilt-inEthernet/HDBaseTportintheprojectorcanberecordedintheprojectormemoryintwoways.

• Select[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2]andthendosettingsfor[DHCP]andtheotheroptions.

Afterdoingthis,select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.Thiswillstoreyoursettingsinmemory.

• Torecallthesettingsfrommemory: Afterselecting[PROFILE1]or [PROFILE2] fromthe[PRO-FILES]list.

Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.• Select[DISABLE]whennotconnectingtoawiredLAN

DHCP PlaceacheckmarktoautomaticallyassignanIPaddresstotheprojectorfromyourDHCPserver.ClearthischeckboxtoregistertheIPaddressorsubnetmasknumberobtainedfromyournetworkadministrator.

IPADDRESS SetyourIPaddressof thenetworkconnectedtotheprojectorwhen[DHCP]isturnedoff.

Upto12numericcharacters

SUBNETMASK Setyoursubnetmasknumberofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojectorwhen[DHCP]isturnedoff.

Upto12numericcharacters

GATEWAY Setthedefaultgatewayofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojectorwhen[DHCP]isturnedoff.

Upto12numericcharacters

AUTODNS PlaceacheckmarktoautomaticallyassigntheIPaddressofyourDNSserverconnectedtotheprojectorfromyourDHCPserver.ClearthischeckboxtosettheIPaddressofyourDNSserverconnectedtotheprojector.

Upto12numericcharacters

DNSCONFIGURA-TION

SettheIPaddressofyourDNSserveronthenetworkconnectedtotheprojectorwhen[AUTODNS]iscleared.

Upto12numericcharacters

RECONNECT Retrytoconnecttheprojectortoanetwork.Trythisifyouhavechanged[PROFILES].

Page 122: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

109

5. Using On-Screen Menu

PROJECTORNAME

PROJECTORNAME Setauniqueprojectorname. Upto16alphanu-mericcharactersandsymbols

DOMAINSetahostnameanddomainnameoftheprojector.

HOSTNAME Setahostnameoftheprojector. Upto15alphanumericcharacters

DOMAINNAME Setadomainnameoftheprojector. Upto60alphanumericcharacters

Page 123: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

110

5. Using On-Screen Menu

ALERTMAIL

ALERTMAIL Thisoptionwillnotifyyourcomputeroferrormessagesviae-mailwhenusingwiredLAN.Placing a checkmark will turn on the Alert Mail feature�Clearing a checkmark will turn off the Alert Mail feature�Sample of a message to be sent from the projector:

Subject:[Projector]ProjectorInformationTHECOOLINGFANHASSTOPPED.[INFORMATION]PROJECTORNAME:PX602ULSeriesLIGHTHOURSUSED:0000[H]

HOSTNAME Typeinahostname. Upto15alphanumericcharacters

DOMAINNAME Typeinadomainnameofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector. Upto60alphanumericcharacters

SENDER'SADDRESS Specifythesender’saddress. Upto60alphanu-mericcharactersandsymbols

SMTPSERVERNAME

TypeintheSMTPservernametobeconnectedtotheprojector. Upto60alphanumericcharacters

RECIPIENT'SAD-DRESS1,2,3

Typeinyourrecipient’saddress. Upto60alphanu-mericcharactersandsymbols

TESTMAIL Sendatestmailtocheckifyoursettingsarecorrect.NOTE:• Ifyouenteredanincorrectaddressinatest,youmaynotreceiveanAlertmail. Should this happen, check if theRecipient’sAddress iscorrectly set.

• Unless any one of the [SENDER'SADDRESS], [SMTPSERVER'SNAME]or[RECIPIENT'SADDRESS1-3]isselected,[TESTMAIL]isnot available.

• Besuretohighlight[OK]andpresstheENTERbuttonbeforeexecuting[TESTMAIL].

Page 124: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

111

5. Using On-Screen Menu

NETWORKSERVICE

HTTPSERVER SetapasswordforyourHTTPserver. Upto10alphanumericcharacters

PJLink ThisoptionallowsyoutosetapasswordwhenyouusethePJ-Linkfeature.NOTE: • Donotforgetyourpassword.However,ifyouforgetyourpassword,

consult with your dealer. • WhatisPJLink? PJLinkisastandardizationofprotocolusedforcontrollingprojectors

of different manufacturers. This standard protocol is established by JapanBusinessMachineandInformationSystemIndustriesAssocia-tion(JBMIA)in2005.

TheprojectorsupportsallthecommandsofPJLinkClass1.• SettingofPJLinkwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefrom

the menu.

Upto32alphanumericcharacters

AMXBEACON TurnonorofffordetectionfromAMXDeviceDiscoverywhencon-nectingtothenetworksupportedbyAMX’sNetLinxcontrolsystem.

TIP:WhenusingadevicethatsupportsAMXDeviceDiscovery,allAMXNetLinxcontrol system will recognize the device and download the appropriate DeviceDiscoveryModulefromanAMXserver.

Selecting [ON] will enable to detect the projector from AMX Device Discovery�Selecting [OFF] will disable to detect the projector from AMX Device Discovery�

CRESTRON ROOMVIEW:TurnonoroffwhencontrollingtheprojectorfromyourPC.PlacingacheckmarkwillenabletocontroltheprojectorfromyourPC.CRESTRONCONTROL:Turn on or offwhen controlling theprojectorfromyourcontroller.Placingacheckmarkwillenabletocontroltheprojectorfromyourcontroller.• CONTROLLERIPADDRESS:EnteryourIPaddressofCREST-RONSERVER.

• IPID:EnteryourIPIDofCRESTRONSERVER.

Upto12numericcharacters

ExtronXTP SetforconnectingthisprojectortotheExtronXTPtransmitter.Selecting[ON]willenabletoconnectwiththeXTPtransmitter.Selecting[OFF]willdisabletoconnectwiththeXTPtransmitter.

TIP:TheCRESTRONsettingsarerequiredonlyforusewithCRESTRONROOMVIEW.Formoreinformation,visithttp://www.crestron.com

Page 125: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

112

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[SOURCE OPTIONS]

SettingAutoAdjust[AUTOADJUST]ThisfeaturesetstheAutoAdjustmodesothatthecomputersignalcanbeautomaticallyormanuallyadjustedfornoiseandstability.Youcanautomaticallymakeadjustmentintwoways:[NORMAL]and[FINE].

OFF ������������������������ The computer signal will not be automatically adjusted� You can manually optimize the computer signal�NORMAL ���������������� Default setting� The computer signal will be automatically adjusted� Normally select this option�FINE ����������������������� Select this option if fine adjustment is needed� It takes more time to switch to the source than when [NOR-

MAL]is selected�

TIP:• Thedefaultsettingwhenshippedfromthefactoryis[NORMAL].• WhentheAUTOADJ.buttonispressed,thesame[FINE]adjustmentiscarriedout.

[COLORSYSTEM]ThisfeatureallowsyoutoselecttheTVvideosignal,whichdiffersfromcountrytocountry(NTSC,PAL,etc.).Thisissetto[AUTO]byfactorydefault.Setthisiftheprojectorcannotidentifythesignalautomatically.

SelectingDefaultSource[DEFAULTINPUTSELECT]Youcansettheprojectortodefaulttoanyoneofitsinputseachtimetheprojectoristurnedon.

LAST ���������������������� Set the projector to default to the previous or last active input each time the projector is turned on�AUTO ��������������������� Search for an active source in order of HDMI → DisplayPort → BNC → BNC(CV) → BNC(Y/C) → COMPUTER

→ HDBaseT → SLOT and displays the first found source�HDMI ��������������������� Display the digital source from the HDMI IN terminal every time the projector is turned on� DisplayPort ������������ Display the digital source from the DisplayPort IN terminal every time the projector is turned on� BNC ����������������������� Project the input signal from the BNC input terminalBNC(CV) ���������������� Project the input signal from the BNC(CV) input terminal�BNC(Y/C) ��������������� Project the input signal from the BNC(Y/C) input terminal�COMPUTER ����������� Display the computer signal from the COMPUTER 1 IN terminal every time the projector is turned on�HDBaseT ���������������� Project the HDBaseT or WIRED LAN signal�SLOT ���������������������� Project the picture via the optional board (sold separately) inserted into the SLOT�

Page 126: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

113

5. Using On-Screen Menu

SettingClosedCaption[CLOSEDCAPTION]ThisoptionsetsseveralclosedcaptionmodesthatallowtexttobesuperimposedontheprojectedimageofVideoorS-Video.Thesubtitlesandtextwillbedisplayedashortwhileaftertheon-screenmenudisappears.

OFF ������������������������ This exits the closed caption mode�CAPTION 1-4 ��������� Text is superimposed�TEXT 1-4 ���������������� Text is displayed�

SelectingaColororLogoforBackground[BACKGROUND]Usethisfeaturetodisplayablue/blackscreenorlogowhennosignalisavailable.Thedefaultbackgroundis[BLUE].

NOTE: • Evenwhenthebackgroundlogoisselected,iftwopicturesaredisplayedin[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]mode,thebluebackground

is displayed without the logo when there is no signal.

Page 127: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

114

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[POWER OPTIONS]

SelectingPower-savingin[STANDBYMODE]Settingthepowerconsumptioninthestandbymode.

NORMAL ���������������� In the standby mode, the power consumption of the projector is 0�5 W�In the standby mode, the POWER indicator lights up in red while the STATUS indicator will go off�• Whensetto[NORMAL],thefollowingterminalsandfunctionswillbedisabled.HDMIOUTterminals,

Ethernet/HDBaseT port, LAN function, mail notification functionNETWORK STANDBY ������������������������������ Compared to [NORMAL], the power consumption in the standby mode is higher but power can be supplied

to the projector using a wired LAN�In the standby mode, the power indicator will light up in orange while the status indicator will be turned off�

Important:• When[NETWORKSTANDBY]isselected,[AUTOPOWEROFF]willturngreyincolorandbedisabledand[0:15]willbeselected

automatically.• Inthefollowingconditions,the[STANDBYMODE]settingwillbedisabledandtheprojectorwillgointothesleepmode.Inthe

sleep mode, the fans in the projector rotate for the purpose of interior parts protection.* Sleepmodereferstothemodewherebythefunctionalrestrictionsduetothe[STANDBYMODE]settingareremoved.• When[ON]isselectedunder[NETWORKSERVICE]→[AMXBEACON]• Whenacheckmarkisplacedfor[NETWORKSERVICE]→[CRESTRON]→[CRESTRONCONTROL]• When[ON]isselectedunder[NETWORKSERVICE]→[ExtronXTP]• When[HDBaseT]isselectedunder[CONTROL]→[REMOTESENSOR]• WhenasignalisbeingreceivedfromaHDBaseTtransmissiondevice

• When[NORMAL]isselected,the[AUTOPOWERONSELECT]displayturnsgreyincolorandisdisabled,and[OFF]isautomati-cally selected.

NOTE:• WhenconnectingtoaHDBaseTtransmissiondevicesoldcommercially,ifthetransmissiondeviceissettotransmitremotecontrol

signals, the power consumption of the projector in the standby mode will increase.

TIP:• Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.• ThepowerconsumptioninthestandbymodewillnotbeincludedincalculatingCO2 emission reduction.

EnablingDirectPowerOn[DIRECTPOWERON]Turnstheprojectoronautomaticallywhenthepowercordisinsertedintoanactivepoweroutlet.ThiseliminatestheneedtoalwaysusethePOWERbuttonontheremotecontrolorprojectorcabinet.

Page 128: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

115

5. Using On-Screen Menu

TurningOntheProjectorByApplyingComputerSignal[AUTOPOWERONSELECT]Ifsetto[NETWORKSTANDBY],theprojectorautomaticallydetectsthesynchronizingsignalinputfromthefollowingselectedterminalsandprojectsthepictureaccordingly:Computer,HDMI,DisplayPort,HDBaseT,andSLOT.

OFF ������������������������ AUTO POWER ON SELECT function will be switch off�HDMI, DisplayPort, COMPUTER, HDBaseT, SLOT ������������������������������ When a computer signal of a selected input terminal is detected, the power supply of the projector will be

turned on automatically and the computer screen will be projected�

NOTE: • IfyouwanttoactivatetheAUTOPOWERONSELECTfunctionafterpoweringOFFtheprojector,interruptthesignalfromtheinput

terminals or disconnect the computer cable from the projector and wait for at least 3 seconds before inputting the signal from theselectedterminal.WhentheprojectoristurnedoffandentersNETWORKSTANDBYmode,butsignalsfromthecomputercontinuetobesenttheprojector,theprojectormaintainsNETWORKSTANDBYmodeandwillnotturnONautomatically.Inaddi-tion,ifsignalsfromHDMI,DisplayPortorHDBaseTcontinuetobesenttotheprojector,dependingonthesettingsofconnectedexternaldevices,theprojectormayturnONautomaticallyevenifitispoweredoffandNETWORKSTANDBYmodeisineffect.

• ThisfunctiondoesnotworkwhencomponentsignalscomeintoCOMPUTER1INterminalorwhencomputersignalsareSynconGreenorCompositeSync.

EnablingPowerManagement[AUTOPOWEROFF]Whenthisoptionisselectedyoucanenabletheprojectortoautomaticallyturnoff(attheselectedtime:0:05,0:10,0:15,0:20,0:30,1:00)ifthereisnosignalreceivedbyanyinputorifnooperationisperformed.

NOTE:• ThepowerwillnotgooffautomaticallywhenasignalfromtheEthernet/HDBaseTportisbeingprojected.• [AUTOPOWEROFF]appearsingreywhenthe[STANDBYMODE]issetto[NETWORKSTANDBY]and[0:15]willbesetautomati-

cally.

UsingOffTimer[OFFTIMER]1. Select your desired time between 30 minutes and 16 hours: OFF, 0:30, 1:00, 2:00, 4:00, 8:00, 12:00, 16:00.

2. Press the ENTER button on the remote control.

3. The remaining time starts counting down.

4. Theprojectorwillturnoffafterthecountdowniscomplete.

NOTE:• Tocancelthepresettime,set[OFF]forthepresettimeorturnoffthepower.• Whentheremainingtimereaches3minutesbeforetheprojectoristurnedoff,the[THEPROJECTORWILLTURNOFFWITHIN3MINUTES]messagewillbedisplayedonthebottomofthescreen.

SettingfortheOptionalBoard[SLOTPOWER]Whenusingtheoptionalboardinstalledintheslot,setthefollowingoptions.

PROJECTOR ON �����������������This feature will turn on or off the power to the optional board� OFF: Forcibly turn off the power to the optional board installed in the slot�ON (Default): Turn on the power to the optional board installed in the slot�

PROJECTOR STANDBY �������This feature will automatically enable or disable the optional board installed in the slot when the projector is in standby�DISABLE: Select this option to disable the optional board in the projector standby�ENABLE (Default): Select this option to enable the optional board in the projector standby�

Page 129: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

116

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Returning to Factory Default [RESET]TheRESETfeatureallowsyoutochangeadjustmentsandsettingstothefactorypresetfora(all)source(s)exceptthefollowing:

[CURRENTSIGNAL]Resetstheadjustmentsforthecurrentsignaltothefactorypresetlevels.Theitemsthatcanberesetare:[PRESET],[CONTRAST],[BRIGHTNESS],[COLOR],[HUE],[SHARPNESS],[AS-PECTRATIO],[HORIZONTAL],[VERTICAL],[CLOCK],[PHASE],and[OVERSCAN].

[ALLDATA]Resetalltheadjustmentsandsettingsforallthesignalstothefactorypreset.AllitemscanberesetEXCEPT[LANGUAGE],[BACKGROUND],[EDGEBLENDING],[MULTISCREEN],[SCREENTYPE],[GEOMETRICCORRECTION],[REF.WHITEBALANCE],[CONTROLPANELLOCK],[SECURITY],[COM-MUNICATIONSPEED],[CONTROLID],[STANDBYMODE],[FANMODE],[LIGHTHOURSUSED],[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS],and[WIREDLAN].

[ALLDATA(INCLUDINGENTRYLIST)]Resetalltheadjustmentsandsettingsforallthesignalstothefactorypresetexcept[LANGUAGE],[BACKGROUND],[EDGEBLENDING],[MULTISCREEN],[SCREENTYPE],[GEOMETRICCORRECTION],[REF.WHITEBALANCE],[CONTROLPANELLOCK],[SECURITY],[COMMUNICATIONSPEED],[CONTROLID],[STANDBYMODE],[FANMODE],[LIGHTHOURSUSED],[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS],and[WIREDLAN].Alsodeletesallthesignalsinthe[ENTRYLIST]andreturnstothefactorypreset.

NOTE:LockedsignalsinEntryListcannotbereset.

Page 130: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

117

5. Using On-Screen Menu

❽ Menu Descriptions & Functions [INFO.]Displaysthestatusofthecurrentsignalandlightmoduleusage.Thisitemhasninepages.Theinformationincludedisasfollows:

TIP:PressingtheHELPbuttonontheremotecontrolwillshowthe[INFO.]menuitems.

[USAGE TIME]

[LIGHTHOURSUSED](H)[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS](kg-CO2)

• [TOTALCARBONSAVINGS]

Thisdisplaystheestimatedcarbonsavinginformationinkg.Thecarbonfootprintfactorinthecarbonsavingcal-culationisbasedontheOECD(2008Edition).(→page31)

[SOURCE(1)]

INPUTTERMINAL RESOLUTIONHORIZONTALFREQUENCY VERTICALFREQUENCYSYNCTYPE SYNCPOLARITYSCANTYPE SOURCENAMEENTRYNO.

Page 131: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

118

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[SOURCE(2)]

SIGNALTYPE VIDEOTYPEBITDEPTH VIDEOLEVELLINKRATE LINKLANE3DFORMAT

[SOURCE(3)]

INPUTTERMINAL RESOLUTIONHORIZONTALFREQUENCY VERTICALFREQUENCYSYNCTYPE SYNCPOLARITYSCANTYPE SOURCENAMEENTRYNO.

[SOURCE(4)]

SIGNALTYPE VIDEOTYPEBITDEPTH VIDEOLEVELLINKRATE LINKLANE3DFORMAT

Page 132: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

119

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[WIRED LAN]

IPADDRESS SUBNETMASKGATEWAY MACADDRESS

[VERSION(1)]

FIRMWARE DATASUB-CPU

[OTHERS]

DATETIME PROJECTORNAMEMODELNO. SERIALNUMBERCONTROLID(when[CONTROLID]isset)

Page 133: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

120

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[HDBaseT]

SIGNALQUALITY OPERATIONMODELINKSTATUS HDMISTATUS

Page 134: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

121

❶ Mounting a lens (sold separately)Thisprojectorcanbeusedwith3kindsofoptionallenses(soldseparately).Thechartbelowshowscompatiblelensesaccordingtotheprojectormodel.ThedescriptionsherearefortheNP35ZL(standardzoom)lens.Mountotherlensesinthesamemanner.Seepage164forlensoptions.

Lens(model)

Projector(modelname) NP34ZLShortfocuszoom

NP35ZLStandardzoom

NP36ZLStandardzoom

NP37ZLLongfocuszoom

PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK Yes Yes No Yes

PX602WL-WH/PX602WL-BK Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes=canbemounted,No=cannotbemounted

WARNING:(1)Turnoffthepowerandwaitforthecoolingfantostop,(2)turnoffthemainpowerswitch,(3)disconnectthepowercordandwaitfortheunittocoolbeforemountingorremovingthelens.Failuretodosocanresultineyeinjury,electricshock,orburninjuries.

NOTE:• Theprojectorandlensesaremadeofprecisionparts.Donotsubjectthemtoshockorexcessiveforces.• Removetheseparatelysoldlenswhenmovingtheprojector.Ifnot,thelenscouldbesubjecttoshockwhiletheprojectorisbeing

moved, damaging the lens and the lens shift mechanism.• Whendismountingthelensfromtheprojector,returnthelenspositiontothehomepositionbeforeturningoffthepower.Failure

to do so may prevent the lens from being mounted or dismounted because of narrow space between the projector and the lens.• Nevertouchthelenssurfacewhiletheprojectorisoperating.• Beverycarefulnottoletdirt,grease,etc.,onthelenssurfaceandnottoscratchthelenssurface.• Performtheseoperationsonaflatsurfaceoverapieceofcloth,etc.,topreventthelensfromgettingscratched.• Whenleavingthelensofftheprojectorforlongperiodsoftime,mountthedustcapontheprojectortopreventdustordirtfromgettinginside.Ifthelensremainsdetachedfromtheprojectorforlongperiodsoftime,dustmaycollectwithintheopticalunitand damage the lens, causing deterioration of projected image.

• Othertypesoflensescannotbemountedonthisprojector.TheNP34ZL/NP35ZL/NP36ZL/NP37ZLseriesoflensescannotbemounted onto other projector models.

Part Names of the Lens MountAttachingtheLensMountRotateandalignthe3flangesonthelenswiththe3flangecatchesonthelensmount.Thelenscanbesecuredtothemountusingalockmechanism.

“TOP”orientationindicator

Lenscap

Flange(3places)

Lockingscrew

Hook(3places)

Lenshood

Lockreleasebutton

LenscapCatch(3places)

Frontpanel

Protectivecap

Mountlock

Lens

6. Connecting to Other Equipment

Page 135: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

122

6. Installation and Connections

UsingthelockmechanismRelease:LockingscrewistightenedThelenscanbeattachedordetached(factorydefaultsetting).

Lock:LockingscrewisuntightenedThelenscannotbeattachedordetached.Pressingthelockreleasebut-tonallthewayindisablesthelockmechanismandallowsthelenstobeattachedordetached.

Mounting the lensPreparation:Prepareaflatheadscrewdriver.* Theillustrationomitstheprojectorcabinet.

1. Remove the lens hood.

(1)Loosenthe2screwspinchingandturningthemcounter-clockwisebyyourfingers.

• Thescrewswillremaintostaynotberemoved.

(2)Removethelenshoodbyturningitcounterclockwise.Thehooksonthelenshoodwilldisengagefromthefrontpanel.

2. Remove the protective cap.

• Theunitisshippedfromthefactorywiththeprotectivecapinstalled.

Turntheprotectivecapcounterclockwisetoreleaseitfromthecatch.Removethecap.

• Pleasestoretheprotectivecapinasafeplace.

3. Removethelenscapsoneithersideofthelens.

• TheNP35ZLlensunitisusedasanexample.

• Pleasestorethelenscapinasafeplace.

NOTE:• Besuretoremovethelenscap.Ifthelightsourceisturnedonwhen

the lens cap remains on the lens, it may be cause of malfunction.

Page 136: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

123

6. Installation and Connections

4. Withthe“TOP”orientationindicatorfacingupwards,insertthe lens into the lens mount.

Aligntheflangeontheupperportionofthelenswiththecatchontheleftsideofthelensmount.

NOTE:• Insertthelenscarefullytoavoiditfromdamagebyknockingagainst

the lens mount.

5. Turn the lens clockwise until it clicks into place.

The3flangeshavenowengagedwiththe3catchesandthelensunithasbeenmounted.

• Tolockthelensunitsee“Usingthelockmechanism”onthepreviouspage.

6. Mountthelenshoodtothefrontpanel.

(1)Align▲markedonthelenshoodandthefrontpaneltop.

(2)Turnthelenshoodclockwise.

Thehooksintherearwillengagewiththefrontpanelflange.

(3)Tightenthe2screwsbyyourfingers.

Page 137: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

124

6. Installation and Connections

Removing the lensPreparation:Returnthelenspositiontothehomeposition.(→page19)Afterthelensshifthasmoved,refertothewarningonpage19andturnoffthepower.

1. Remove the lens hood.

RefertoStep1under“Mountingthelens”.

• Ifthelensunitislockedpleaseseepage122andfollowtheinstructionsunderUsingtheLockFunctiontounlockit.

2. Turnthelenscounterclockwisetoremoveitfromthecatch,andslowlypullforwardtoremove.

• Afterremovingthelens,mountthelenscaps(frontandback)includedwiththelensbeforestoringthelens.

• Toreplacethelens,seeStep3of“Mountingthelens”.

3. Mount the protective cap.

Aligntheflangeontheprotectivecaptotheleftsideof thecatchandturnclockwiseuntilitclicksintoplace.

4. Mount the lens hood to the panel.

RefertoStep7under“Mountingthelens”.

Page 138: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

125

6. Installation and Connections

❷ Making ConnectionsAcomputercable,BNCcable(5-coretype),HDMIcable,oraDisplayPortcablecanbeusedtoconnecttoacomputer.Theconnectioncableisnotenclosedwiththeprojector.Pleasegetreadyasuitablecablefortheconnection.

Analog RGB signal connection

• Connectthecomputercabletothedisplayoutputterminal(miniD-sub15pin)onthecomputerandtheCOMPUTER1INterminalontheprojector.Pleaseuseacomputercableattachedwithaferritecore.

• Whenconnectingthedisplayoutputterminal(miniD-sub15pin)onthecomputertotheBNCinputterminal,useaconversioncabletoconverttheBNCcable(5core)toaminiD-sub15pincable.

• Selectthesourcenameforitsappropriateinputterminalafterturningontheprojector.

InputterminalSOURCEbuttonontheprojector

cabinetButtonontheremotecontrol

COMPUTER1IN COMPUTER COMPUTER1

BNC BNC COMPUTER2

COMPUTER 1 IN

Computercable(soldcommercially)

RGB-to-BNCcable(notsupplied)

NOTE:Pleasechecktheoperatingmanualofthe computer as the name, position and direc-tion of the terminal may differ depending on the computer.

Page 139: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

126

6. Installation and Connections

Digital RGB signal connection

• ConnectacommerciallyavailableHDMIcablebetweenthecomputer’sHDMIoutputterminalandtheprojector’sHDMIINterminal.

• ConnectacommerciallyavailableDisplayPortcablebetweenthecomputer’sDisplayPortoutputterminalandtheprojector’sDisplayPortINterminal.

• Selectthesourcenameforitsappropriateinputterminalafterturningontheprojector.

InputterminalSOURCEbuttonontheprojector

cabinetButtonontheremotecontrol

HDMIIN HDMI HDMI

DisplayPortIN DisplayPort DisplayPort

DisplayPort INHDMI IN

HDMIcable(notsupplied) DisplayPortcable(notsupplied)

Page 140: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

127

6. Installation and Connections

CautionswhenconnectinganHDMIcable• UseacertifiedHighSpeedHDMI®CableorHighSpeedHDMI®CablewithEthernet.

CautionswhenconnectingaDisplayPortcable• UseacertifiedDisplayPortcable.

• Dependingonthecomputer,sometimemayberequireduntiltheimageisdisplayed.

• SomeDisplayPortcables(commerciallyavailable)havelocks.

• Todisconnectthecable,pressthebuttononthetopofthecable’sterminal,thenpullthecableout.

• PowercanbesuppliedtotheconnectingdevicefromtheDisplayPortINterminal(maximumof1.65W).However,powerwillnotbesuppliedtothecomputer.

• WhensignalsfromadevicethatusesasignalconverteradapterareconnectedtotheDisplayPortINterminal,insomecasestheimagemaynotbedisplayed.

• WhentheHDMIoutputofacomputerisconnectedtotheDisplayPortINterminal,useaconverter(commerciallyavailable).

Page 141: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

128

6. Installation and Connections

CautionswhenusingaDVIsignal• WhenthecomputerhasaDVIoutputterminal,useacommerciallyavailableconvertercabletoconnectthecom-

putertotheprojector’sHDMIINterminal(onlydigitalvideosignalscanbeinput).

HDMI IN

NOTE:WhenViewingaDVIDigitalSignal• Turnoffthepowerofthecomputerandprojectorbeforeconnectingdevices.• Whenavideodeckisconnectedviaascanconverter,etc.,thedisplaymaynotbecorrectduringfast-forwardingandrewinding.• UseaDVI-to-HDMIcablecompliantwithDDWG(DigitalDisplayWorkingGroup)DVI(DigitalVisualInterface)revision1.0stan-dard.Thecableshouldbewithin197"/5mlong.

• TurnofftheprojectorandthePCbeforeconnectingtheDVI-to-HDMIcable.• ToprojectaDVIdigitalsignal:Connectthecables,turntheprojectoron,thenselecttheHDMI.Finally,turnonyourPC. Failuretodosomaynotactivatethedigitaloutputofthegraphicscardresultinginnopicturebeingdisplayed.Shouldthishappen,restartyourPC.

• SomegraphicscardshavebothanalogRGB(15-pinD-Sub)andDVI(orDFP)outputs.Useofthe15-pinD-Subterminalmayresult in no picture being displayed from the digital output of the graphics card.

• DonotdisconnecttheDVI-to-HDMIcablewhiletheprojector isrunning.If thesignalcablehasbeendisconnectedandthenreconnected,animagemaynotbecorrectlydisplayed.Shouldthishappen,restartyourPC.

• TheCOMPUTER1INterminalssupportWindowsPlugandPlay.TheBNCinputterminaldoesnotsupportWindowsPlugandPlay.

• AMacsignaladapter(commerciallyavailable)mayberequiredtoconnectaMaccomputer. ToconnectaMaccomputerequippedwithaMiniDisplayPorttotheprojector,useacommerciallyavailableMiniDisplayPort→ DisplayPortconvertercable.

Page 142: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

129

6. Installation and Connections

HDMI IN

HDMI OUT

Connecting an External Monitor

Youcanconnectaseparate,externalmonitortoyourprojectortosimultaneouslyviewonamonitorthecomputeranalogimageyou’reprojecting.• BNC(CV)componentvideosignalsandBNC(Y/C)S-videosignalswillnotbeoutput.• PleaserefertoPage52whendisplayingthePIP/PBPscreen.

NOTE:• WhenoutputtingHDMIsignals,turnonthepowerofthevideodeviceontheoutputsideandkeepitconnectedbeforeinputtingvideosignalsintothisdevice.TheHDMIOUTterminalsoftheprojectorareequippedwithrepeaterfunctions.WhenadeviceisconnectedtotheHDMIOUTterminal,theresolutionoftheoutputsignalislimitedbytheresolutionsupportedbytheconnecteddevice.

• InthecaseoftheHDMIOUTterminaloftheprojector,thetheoreticalnumberofunitsthatcanbeconnectedinaseriesisseven.The maximum number of units that can be connected may be reduced by the external environment and quality of the signal and cable,etc.ThenumberofunitsthatcanbeconnectedmaydifferdependingontheHDCPversion,restrictiononthenumberofHDCPrepeatersinthesourcedeviceandthequalityofthecable.Theoverallsystemneedstobecheckedinadvancewhenbuild-ing a system.

• Whenthe[STANDBYMODE]issetto[NORMAL],videowillnotbeoutputiftheprojectorgoesintothestandbymode.Setthemodeto[NETWORKSTANDBY],turnonthepowerofthetransmissiondeviceandkeepitinaconnectedstate.

• Whenthe[STANDBYMODE]ofthisdeviceissetto[NORMAL],HDMIsignalswillnotbeoutput.TooutputHDMIsignals,setthe[STANDBYMODE]to[NETWORKSTANDBY],turnonthepowersupplyofthetransmissiondeviceandkeepitconnected.

• HDMIrepeaterfunctionwillnotbefunctionedifswitchingterminalsandputtingin/pullingouttheHDMIcableisperformedonthe 2nd projector and after.

Computercable(VGA)(notsupplied)

HDMIcable(notsupplied)

Page 143: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

130

6. Installation and Connections

Connecting Your Blu-ray Player or Other AV EquipmentComponentvideosignal/S-videosignalconnection

• Selectthesourcenameforitsappropriateinputterminalafterturningontheprojector.

InputterminalSOURCEbuttonontheprojector

cabinetButtonontheremotecontrol

BNC(CV) BNC(CV) VIDEO

BNC(Y/C) BNC(Y/C) S-VIDEO

CV Y C

BNC(CV)BNC(Y) BNC(C)

BNCcable(notsupplied)

Audioequipment

Page 144: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

131

6. Installation and Connections

Connecting Component Input

• Selectthesourcenameforitsappropriateinputterminalafterturningontheprojector.

InputterminalSOURCEbuttonontheprojector

cabinetButtonontheremotecontrol

COMPUTER1IN COMPUTER COMPUTER1

BNC BNC COMPUTER2

NOTE:• Whenthesignalformatissetto[AUTO](defaultfactorysettingwhenshipped),thecomputersignalandcomponentsignalareautomatically distinguished and switched. If the signals cannot bedistinguished, select [COMPONENT]under [ADJUST]→ [VIDEO]→[SIGNALTYPE]intheon-screenmenuoftheprojector.

• ToconnecttoavideodevicewithaDterminal,usethesoldseparatelyDterminalconverteradapter(modelADP-DT1E).

COMPUTER 1 IN

15-pin-to-RCA(female)×3cableadapter(ADP-CV1E) BNC(male)-to-RCA(male)conversion

cable×3(soldcommercially)

ComponentvideoRCA×3cable(notsup-plied)

Blu-rayplayer

AudioEquipment

Page 145: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

132

6. Installation and Connections

Connecting HDMI InputYoucanconnecttheHDMIoutputofyourBlu-rayplayer,harddiskplayer,ornotebooktypePCtotheHDMIINterminalofyourprojector.

InputterminalSOURCEbuttonontheprojector

cabinetButtonontheremotecontrol

HDMIIN HDMI HDMI

TIP:ForusersofaudiovideoequipmentwithanHDMIterminal:Select“Enhanced”ratherthan“Normal”ifHDMIoutputisswitchablebetween“Enhanced”and“Normal”.This will provide improved image contrast and more detailed dark areas.Formoreinformationonsettings,refertotheinstructionmanualoftheaudiovideoequipmenttobeconnected.

• WhenconnectingtheHDMIINterminaloftheprojectortotheBlu-rayplayer,theprojector’svideolevelcanbemadesettingsinaccordancewiththeBlu-rayplayer’svideolevel.Inthemenuselect[ADJUST]→[VIDEO]→ [VIDEOLEVEL]andmakenecessarysettings.

HDMI IN

Audiocable(notsupplied)

HDMIcable(notsupplied)UseHighSpeedHDMI®Cable.

Page 146: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

133

6. Installation and Connections

Connecting to a Wired LANTheprojectorcomesstandardwithaEthernet/HDBaseTport(RJ-45)whichprovidesaLANconnectionusingaLANcable.TouseaLANconnection,youarerequiredtosettheLANontheprojectormenu.Select[SETUP]→[NETWORKSETTINGS]→[WIREDLAN].(→page107).

Example of LAN connectionExampleofwiredLANconnection

Ethernet/HDBaseT

Server

Hub

LANcable(notsupplied)

NOTE:UseaCategory5orhigherLANcable.

Page 147: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

134

6. Installation and Connections

Connecting to a HDBaseT transmission device (sold commercially)HDBaseTisaconnectionstandardforhomeappliancesthatisestablishedbytheHDBaseTAlliance.UseaLANcablesoldcommerciallytoconnecttheEthernet/HDBaseTportoftheprojector(RJ-45)toaHDBaseTtransmissiondevicesoldcommercially.TheEthernet/HDBaseTportoftheprojectorsupportsHDMIsignals(HDCP)fromtransmissiondevices,controlsignalsfromexternaldevices(serial,LAN)andremotecontrolsignals(IRcommands).

Connection example

Ethernet/HDBaseT

Computer(forcontroluse)Computer(foroutputuse)

Exampleofatransmissiondevice

Remotecontrol

HDMIoutputvideodevice

NOTE:• Pleaseuseashieldedtwistedpair(STP)cableofCategory5eorhigherfortheLANcable(soldcommercially).• ThemaximumtransmissiondistanceovertheLANcableis100m.(themaximumdistanceis70mfora4Ksignal)• Pleasedonotuseothertransmissionequipmentbetweentheprojectorandtransmissionequipment.Thepicturequalitymaybe

deteriorated as a result.• ThisprojectorisnotguaranteedtoworkwithallHDBaseTtransmissiondevicessoldcommercially.

Page 148: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

135

6. Installation and Connections

Portrait projection (vertical orientation)Byusingasafetycover(soldseparately),theprojectorcanbemountedverticallytodisplaycomputerimagesinportraitorientation.Ifthesafetycoverismissing,thepowerwillnotturnon.Allscreens,suchastheon-screenmenus,willberotatedinthecounter-clockwisedirection.Theprojectorisequippedwithasensortoautomaticallydetecttheinstal-lationstate.

Precautionsduringinstallation• Pleasedonotinstalltheprojectorinaverticalorientationontopofthefloorortableonitsown.Ifnot,theprojec-

tormayfallover,resultingininjury,damageormalfunction.

• Forverticalinstallation,installtheprojectorwiththeintakevent(safetycover)facingdownwards.Astandforsupportingtheprojectorneedstobemadeforthispurpose.Inthiscase,thestandmustbedesignedsuchthatthecenterofgravityoftheprojectorislocatedwellwithinthelegsofthestand.Ifnot,theprojectormayfalloverandresultininjury,damageandmalfunction.

• Donotobstructtheintakeventonthesafetycover.Theprojectormayotherwiseoverheat,causingfireandmalfunction.

NOTE:• Whenusingasafetycover,thepowerturnsononlywhentheprojectorventilationintakeisfacingdown.Iftheintakeventfaces

any other direction, the power will not turn on.• Iftheprojectorismountedverticallywithoutasafetycover,thepowerwillnotturnon.

Page 149: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

136

6. Installation and Connections

Design and manufacturing conditions for the stand1. Todisplayimagesinportraitorientation,useasafetycover(soldseparately).(→page137)

2. Pleasehireaninstallationserviceprovider(forafee)forthedesignandmanufactureofacustomizedstandtobeusedforportraitprojection.Pleaseensurethatthedesigncomplieswiththefollowingconditions:

• Thereisanintakeventopeningonthesafetycover.Donotobstructthisopening.

• Thereare2ventilationholesatthebottomoftheprojector.Theseholesshouldremainunobstructed.

• Usethe6screwholesatthebackoftheprojectortosecureittothestand.

Screwholecenterdimension:300×300(pitch=150)mm

Screwholedimensionontheprojector:M4withamaximumdepthof8mm

3ofthelegscanbeunscrewedforremoval.

• Horizontaladjustmentmechanism(forexample,boltsandnutsin4places)

• Pleasedesignthestandsothatitdoesnoteasilytoppleover.* Werecommendcombiningceilingmounts(modelNP15CM,soldseparately)withanangleadjustmentmechanism.

Reference drawings* Thedrawingshowingthedimensionalrequirementsisnotanactualstanddesigndrawing.

32 34

150150

34

85

300

[Side View] [Front View]

Screw holes for 6 - M4 use

□ 84 × 108 holes (Intake vent)

□ 40 × 78 holes (Exhaust vent)

(Unit: mm)

Horizontal adjusterIntake vent

Page 150: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

137

6. Installation and Connections

Mountingthesafetycover(soldseparately)Theprojectorisequippedaswitchforchangingtoverticalmountportraitprojection.Mountthesafetycoverandplaceverticallytochangetoverticalorientationmode.

1. Insert and tighten the 7 screws (turning clockwise) to mount to the projector.

* Ifusinginnormalhorizontalorientation,makesuretoremovethesafetycover.

Toremove,unscrewthe7screws(turningcounter-clockwise).

Page 151: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

138

6. Installation and Connections

Stacking projectorsTheprojectedimagebrightnesscanbedoubledbygravitystackinguptotwoprojectorswithoutexternalsupport.Thisiscalled“StackingProjection”.2projectorscanbestackedontopofeachotherfor“Stacking”setup.

CAUTION:Aminimumoftwopersonsarerequiredtocarrytheprojector.Otherwisetheprojectormaytumbleordrop,causingpersonalinjury.

NOTE:• Projectorswithdifferentmodelnumberscannotbegravitystacked. Optional lenses with the same model numbers must be used for stacking projection.• Forstackingprojectors,attachthesuppliedthreestackingholderstothetopofthelowerprojector.(→ next page)• Itdoesnotsupportoverlayaccuracybystackedprojectors.Preciseimagesassmalltextsanddetailedgraphicscannotbeclearly

read or seen.• Useacommerciallyavailabledistributionamplifiertoboththeprimary(upper)andthesecondary(lower)projectorstodistribute

signal to two outputs of the two projectors.• Notesforstacking- Askyourservicepersonforsettingupandadjustingprojectors.- Setuptheprojectorsinaplaceorstructureinawaywithsufficientstrengthtosupportthecombinedweightofthetwoprojec-tors.Thesingleprojectorwithalensweighsuptoapproximately20kg/44lbs.

- To prevent the projectors from falling, fasten them in a way to withstand earthquakes.- Doublestackingwillcauseroomtemperaturetoincrease.Ventilatetheroomwell.- Donotattempttostackprojectorsontheceiling.Gravitystackingcannotbedoneontheceiling.- Warmuptheprojectorsforonehourbeforethedesiredprojectionisobtained.- Makesurethatthepositionoftheupperprojectordoesnotexceeditsspecifications.Whensettingupthetwoprojectors,

adjustable height range for the tilt feet on the upper projector is added to the total adjustable range.- Setuptheprojectorssothattheprojectedimageshowsaslittlegeometricdistortionsaspossible.Thelensisdifferentingeometricdistortionbetweenwide(+)andtele(−)forzoom.

- Adjustthehorizontallensshifttothelenscenter. s

Page 152: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

139

6. Installation and Connections

AttachingStackingHoldersAttachthreestackingholderstothreelocationsonthetopofthelowerprojector.

Preparation:ToolsrequiredarePhillipsscrewdriver(plus-head)andthreestackingholderspackagedwiththeprojector.Loosenthetiltfeet(threelocations)oftheprojector.

1. Remove rubber caps and screws at three locations.

(1)Useyourtweezersornailtopinchandpulluptherubbercap.

(2)Removethescrewfromasquarehole.(1) (2)

2. Attach the three stacking holders at three locations.

(1)Placeastackingholderinasquarehole.

(2)UsethescrewremovedatStep1tofixthestackingholderinthesquarehole.

(3)PuttherubbercapremovedatStep1backintothesquarehole.

• Snapthetabsonbothoftherubbercapintotheslitsonbothsidesinthesquarehole.(1) (2) (3)

Page 153: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

140

6. Installation and Connections

3. Putanotherprojectoronthefirstprojector.

Puteachtiltfootoftheupperprojectoronthestackingholders(threelocations).

• Eachtiltfoothasarubber.Placeeachtiltfootrubberonstackingholders(threelocations).

Footrubber

TIP:• Toremovethestackingholders,performtheabovestepsinreverseorder.

Page 154: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

141

7. Maintenance❶ Cleaning the Lens• Turnofftheprojectorbeforecleaning.

• Theprojectorhasaplasticlens.Useacommerciallyavailableplasticlenscleaner.

• Donotscratchormarthelenssurfaceasaplasticlensiseasilyscratched.

• Neverusealcoholorglasslenscleanerasdoingsowillcausedamagetotheplasticlenssurface.

WARNING• Pleasedonotuseaspraycontainingflammablegastoremovedustattachedtothelens,etc.Doingsomay

resultinfires.

❷ Cleaning the CabinetTurnofftheprojector,andunplugtheprojectorbeforecleaning.• Useadrysoftclothtowipedustoffthecabinet.

Ifheavilysoiled,useamilddetergent.

• Neverusestrongdetergentsorsolventssuchasalcoholorthinner.

• Whencleaningtheventilationslitsorthespeakerusingavacuumcleaner,donotforcethebrushofthevacuumcleanerintotheslitsofthecabinet.

Vacuumthedustofftheventilationslits.

• Poorventilationcausedbydustaccumulationinventilationopenings(intake,exhaust,alsoatthebottomoftheprojector)canresultinoverheatingandmalfunction.Theseareasshouldbecleanedregularly.

• Donotscratchorhitthecabinetwithyourfingersoranyhardobjects

• Contactyourdealerforcleaningtheinsideoftheprojector.

NOTE:Donotapplyvolatileagentsuchasinsecticideonthecabinet,thelens,orthescreen.Donotleavearubberorvinylproductinprolongedcontactwithit.Otherwisethesurfacefinishwillbedeterioratedorthecoatingmaybestrippedoff.

Page 155: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

142

8. User Supportware❶ Operating Environment for Software Included on CD-ROMNames and Features of Bundled Software Programs

Nameofsoftwareprogram Features

VirtualRemoteTool(Windowsonly)

Whenthecomputerandprojectorareconnectedusinganetwork(wiredLAN),suchoperationsasturningtheprojector’spoweronandoffandswitchingthesignalcanbeperformed.Itisalsopossibletosendanimagetotheprojectorandregisteritasthebackgroundlogo.Oncetheimageisregistered,itcanbelockedtopreventthelogofrombeingoverwritten.

PCControlUtilityPro4PCControlUtilityPro5(forMacOS)

This isasoftwareprogramused tooperate theprojector fromthecomputerwhenthecomputerandtheprojectorareconnectedwithLAN.(→page133)• PCControlUtilityPro4canbeusedwithaserialconnection.

NOTE:• ToconnecttheprojectortothenetworkbyusingtheVirtualRemoteTool,PCControlUtilityPro4,PCControlUtilityPro5,pleaseconfigurethesettingsof[SETUP]→[NETWORKSETTINGS]intheon-screenmenu(→ page 107).

Download serviceFortheupdateinformationaboutthesesoftwareprograms,visitourwebsite:URL:http://www.nec-display.com/dl/en/index.html

Operating Environment

[Windows]

SupportedOS Windows8.1,Windows8.1Pro,Windows8.1Enterprise,Windows8,Windows8Pro,Windows8EnterpriseWindows7HomeBasic,Windows7HomePremium,Windows7Professional,Windows7Ultimate,Windows7EnterpriseWindowsVistaHomeBasic,WindowsVistaHomePremium,WindowsVistaBusiness,WindowsVistaUltimate,WindowsVistaEnterpriseWindowsXPHomeEdition(32-bitversion)ServicePack3orlaterWindowsXPProfessional(32-bitversion)ServicePack3orlater

[Mac]

SupportedOS MacOSXv10.6,v10.7,v10.8,v10.9

Page 156: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

143

8. User Supportware

❷ Installing Software Program

Installation for Windows software

ThesoftwareprogramsexceptPCControlUtilityPro5supportWindows8.1,Windows8,Windows7,WindowsVista,andWindowsXP.

NOTE:• Toinstalloruninstalleachsoftwareprogram,theWindowsuseraccountmusthave“Administrator”privilege(Windows8.1,Windows8,Windows7,WindowsVista)or“ComputerAdministrator”privilege(WindowsXP).

• Exitallrunningprogramsbeforeinstallation.Ifanotherprogramisrunning,theinstallationmaynotbecompleted.• TorunVirtualRemoteToolorPCControlUtilityPro4onWindows8.1,Windows8,WindowsXPHomeEdition,andWindowsXPProfessional,“Microsoft.NETFrameworkVersion2.0”isrequired.TheMicrosoft.NETFrameworkVersion2.0,3.0or3.5isavailablefromMicrosoft’swebpage.Downloadandinstallitonyourcomputer.

1 InserttheaccompanyingNECProjectorCD-ROMintoyourCD-ROMdrive.

Themenuwindowwillbedisplayed.

TIP:Ifthemenuwindowwillnotbedisplayed,trythefollowingprocedure.ForWindows71. Click“start”onWindows.

2. Click“AllPrograms”→ “Accessories” → “Run”.

3. TypeyourCD-ROMdrivename(example:“Q:\”)and“LAUNCHER.EXE”in“Name”.(example:Q:\LAUNCHER.EXE)

4. Click“OK”.

Themenuwindowwillbedisplayed.

Page 157: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

144

8. User Supportware

2 Clickasoftwareprogramyouwishtoinstallonthemenuwindow.

Theinstallationwillstart.

• Followtheinstructionsontheinstallerscreenstocompletetheinstallation.

TIP:UninstallingaSoftwareProgramPreparation:Exit thesoftwareprogrambeforeuninstalling.Touninstall thesoftwareprogram, theWindowsuseraccountmusthave“Administrator”privilege(Windows8.1,Windows8,Windows7,andWindowsVista)or“ComputerAdministrator”privilege(WindowsXP).

•ForWindows8.1/Windows8/Windows7/WindowsVista1 Click“Start”andthen“ControlPanel”.

TheControlPanelwindowwillbedisplayed.

2 Click“Uninstallaprogram”under“Programs”

The“ProgramsandFeatures”windowwillbedisplayed.

3 Selectthesoftwareprogramandclickit.

4 Click“Uninstall/Change”or“Uninstall”.

•Whenthe“UserAccountControl”windowsisdisplayed,click“Continue”.

Followtheinstructionsonthescreenstocompletetheuninstallation.

•ForWindowsXP1 Click“Start”andthen“ControlPanel”.

TheControlPanelwindowwillbedisplayed.

2 Double-click “Add / Remove Programs”.

TheAdd/RemoveProgramswindowwillbedisplayed.

3 Clickthesoftwareprogramfromthelistandthenclick“Remove”.

Followtheinstructionsonthescreenstocompletetheuninstallation.

Page 158: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

145

8. User Supportware

Using on Mac OS

Step 1: Install PC Control Utility Pro 5 on the computer.

1. InserttheaccompanyingNECProjectorCD-ROMinyourMacCD-ROMdrive.

TheCD-ROMiconwillbedisplayedonthedesktop.

2. Double-clicktheCD-ROMicon.

TheCD-ROMwindowwillbedisplayed.

3. Double-clickthe“MacOSX”folder.

4. Double-click“PCControlUtilityPro5.pkg”.

Theinstallerwillstart.

5. Click“Next”.

“ENDUSERLICENSEAGREEMENT”screenwillbedisplayed.

6. Read“ENDUSERLICENSEAGREEMENT”andclick“Next”.

Theconfirmationwindowwillbedisplayed

7. Click“Iacceptthetermsinthelicenseagreement”.

Followtheinstructionsontheinstallerscreenstocompletetheinstallation.

TIP:•Uninstallingasoftwareprogram1. Putthe“PCControlUtilityPro5”foldertotheTrashicon.

2. PuttheconfigurationfileofPCControlUtilityPro5totheTrashicon.

• TheconfigurationfileofPCControlUtilityPro5islocatedin“/Users/<yourusername>/ApplicationData/NECProjectorUserSupportware/PCControlUtilityPro5”.

Page 159: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

146

8. User Supportware

❸ Operating the Projector Via the LAN (Virtual Remote Tool)Thiswillhelpyouperformoperationssuchasprojector’spoweronoroffandsignalselectionviaaLANconnection.Itisalsousedtosendanimagetotheprojectorandregisteritasthelogodataoftheprojector.Afterregisteringit,youcanlockthelogotopreventitfromchanging.

Control FunctionsPowerOn/Off,signalselection,picturefreeze,picturemute,audiomute,Logotransfertotheprojector,andremotecontroloperationonyourPC.

VirtualRemotescreen

RemoteControlWindow Toolbar

ThissectionprovidesanoutlineofpreparationforuseofVirtualRemoteTool.ForinformationonhowtouseVirtualRemoteTool,seeHelpofVirtualRemoteTool.(→page148)

NOTE:• Logodata(graphics)thatcanbesenttotheprojectorwithVirtualRemoteToolhasthefollowingrestrictions: (OnlyviaserialorLANconnection)* Filesize:Within256kilobytes* Imagesize:Withintheresolutionoftheprojector* Fileformat:PNG(Fullcolor)

• Logodata(image)sentusingtheVirtualRemoteToolwillbedisplayedinthecenterwiththesurroundingareainblack.• Toputthedefault“NEClogo”backinthebackgroundlogo,youneedtoregisteritasthebackgroundlogobyusingtheimagefile(PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK:\Logo\NEC_logo2011_WUXGA.png,PX602WL-WH/PX602WL-BK:\Logo\NEC_logo2011_1280x800.png)includedonthesuppliedNECProjectorCD-ROM.

Page 160: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

147

8. User Supportware

Connect the projector to a LAN.ConnecttheprojectortotheLANbyfollowingtheinstructionsin“ConnectingtoaWiredLAN”(→page133)and“10.ControllingtheProjectorbyUsinganHTTPBrowser”(→page42)

Start Virtual Remote Tool

Start using the shortcut icon• Double-clicktheshortcuticon on the Windows Desktop.

Start from the Start menu• Click[Start]→[AllPrograms]or[Programs]→[NECProjectorUserSupportware]→[VirtualRemoteTool]

→[VirtualRemoteTool].

WhenVirtualRemoteToolstartsforthefirsttime,“EasySetup”windowwillbedisplayed.

The“EasySetup”featureisnotavailableonthismodel.Click“CloseEasySetup”.

Closingthe“EasySetup”windowwilldisplaythe“ProjectorList”window.

Selectyourprojectoryouwishtoconnect.ThiswilldisplaytheVirtualRemotescreen.

NOTE:• When[NORMAL]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE]fromthemenu,theprojectorcannotbeturnedonvianetworkconnection.

TIP:• TheVirtualRemoteToolscreen(orToolbar)canbedisplayedwithoutdisplaying“EasySetup”window. Todoso,clicktoplaceacheckmarkfor“ DonotuseEasySetupnexttime”onthescreen.

Page 161: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

148

8. User Supportware

ExitingVirtualRemoteTool1 ClicktheVirtualRemoteToolicon on the Taskbar.

Thepop-upmenuwillbedisplayed.

2 Click“Exit”.

TheVirtualRemoteToolwillbeclosed.

ViewingthehelpfileofVirtualRemoteTool•Displayingthehelpfileusingthetaskbar1 ClicktheVirtualRemoteToolicon onthetaskbarwhenVirtualRemoteToolisrunning.

Thepop-upmenuwillbedisplayed.

2. Click“Help”.

TheHelpscreenwillbedisplayed.

•DisplayingthehelpfileusingtheStartMenu.1. Click“Start”.“Allprograms”or“Programs”.“NECProjectorUserSupportware”.“VirtualRemoteTool”.andthen

“VirtualRemoteToolHelp”inthisorder.

TheHelpscreenwillbedisplayed.

Page 162: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

149

8. User Supportware

❹ Controlling the Projector over a LAN (PC Control Utility Pro 4/Pro 5)Usingtheutilitysoftware“PCControlUtilityPro4”or“PCControlUtilityPro5”includedonthecompanionNECProjec-torCD-ROM,theprojectorcanbecontrolledfromacomputeroveraLAN.PCControlUtilityPro4isaprogramcompatiblewithWindows.(→thispage)PCControlUtilityPro5isaprogramcompatiblewithMacOS.(→page152)

Control FunctionsPowerOn/Off,signalselection,picturefreeze,picturemute,audiomute,adjusting,errormessagenotification,eventschedule.

ScreenofPCControlUtilityPro4

ThissectionprovidesanoutlineofpreparationforuseofPCControlUtilityPro4/Pro5.ForinformationonhowtousePCControlUtilityPro4/Pro5,seeHelpofPCControlUtilityPro4/Pro5.(→page151,152)

Step1:InstallPCControlUtilityPro4/Pro5onthecomputer.Step2:ConnecttheprojectortoaLAN.Step3:StartPCControlUtilityPro4/Pro5.

TIP:• PCControlUtilityPro4canbeusedwithaserialconnection.

Using on Windows

Step 1: Install PC Control Utility Pro 4 on the computer

NOTE:• Toinstalloruninstalltheprogram,theWindowsuseraccountmusthave[Administrator]privilege(Windows8.1,Windows8,Windows7,WindowsVistaandWindowsXP)

• Exitallrunningprogramsbeforeinstallation.Ifanotherprogramisrunning,theinstallationmaynotbecompleted.

1 InserttheaccompanyingNECProjectorCD-ROMintoyourCD-ROMdrive.

Themenuwindowwillbedisplayed.

Page 163: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

150

8. User Supportware

TIP:Ifthemenuwindowwillnotbedisplayed,trythefollowingprocedure.ForWindows7:1. Click“start”onWindows.

2. Click“AllPrograms”→ “Accessories” → “Run”.

3. TypeyourCD-ROMdrivename(example:“Q:\”)and“LAUNCHER.EXE”in“Name”.(example:Q:\LAUNCHER.EXE)

4. Click“OK”.

themenuwindowwillbedisplayed.

2 Click“PCControlUtilityPro4”onthemenuwindow.

Theinstallationwillstart.

Whentheinstallationiscomplete,theWelcomewindowwillbedisplayed.

3 Click“Next”.

“ENDUSERLICENSEAGREEMENT”screenwillbedisplayed.

Read“ENDUSERLICENSEAGREEMENT”carefully.

4 Ifyouagree,click“Iacceptthetermsinthelicenseagreement”andthenclick“Next”.

• Followtheinstructionsontheinstallerscreenstocompletetheinstallation.

• Whentheinstallationiscomplete,youwillreturntothemenuwindow.

TIP:•UninstallingPCControlUtilityPro4TouninstallPCControlUtilityPro4,dothesameproceduresstatedasin“UninstallingaSoftwareProgram”.(→ page 144, 145)

Page 164: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

151

8. User Supportware

Step 2: Connect the projector to a LAN.ConnecttheprojectortotheLANbyfollowingtheinstructionsin“ConnectingtoaWiredLAN”(→page133)and“10.ControllingtheProjectorbyUsinganHTTPBrowser”(→page42)

Step 3: Start PC Control Utility Pro 4Click“Start”→“Allprograms”or“Programs”→“NECProjectorUserSupportware”→“PCControlUtilityPro4”→“PCControlUtilityPro4”.

NOTE: • FortheSchedulefunctionofthePCControlutilityPro4towork,youmusthaveyourcomputerrunningandnotinstandby/sleepmode.Select“PowerOptions”fromthe“ControlPanel”inWindowsanddisableitsstandby/sleepmodebeforerunningthescheduler.

[Example]ForWindows7:Select“ControlPanel”→“SystemandSecurity”→“PowerOptions”→“Changewhenthecomputersleeps”→“Putthecomputertosleep”→“Never”.NOTE: • When[NORMAL]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE]fromthemenu,theprojectorcannotbeturnedonviathenetwork(wiredLAN)

connection.

TIP:ViewingtheHelpofPCControlUtilityPro4• DisplayingtheHelpfileofPCControlUtilityPro4whileitisrunning.

Click“Help(H)”→“Help(H)…”ofwindowofPCControlUtilityPro4inthisorder.

Thepop-upmenuwillbedisplayed.

• DisplayingthehelpfileusingtheStartMenu.

Click“Start”→“Allprograms”or“Programs”→“NECProjectorUserSupportware”→“PCControlUtilityPro4”→“PCControlUtilityPro4Help”.

TheHelpscreenwillbedisplayed.

Page 165: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

152

8. User Supportware

Using on Mac OS

Step 1: Install PC Control Utility Pro 5 on the computer1. InserttheaccompanyingNECProjectorCD-ROMinyourMacCD-ROMdrive.

TheCD-ROMiconwillbedisplayedonthedesktop.

2. Double-clicktheCD-ROMicon.

TheCD-ROMwindowwillbedisplayed.

3. Double-clickthe“MacOSX”folder.

4. Double-click“PCControlUtilityPro5.pkg”.

Theinstallerwillstart.

5. Click“Next”.

“ENDUSERLICENSEAGREEMENT”screenwillbedisplayed.

6. Read“ENDUSERLICENSEAGREEMENT”andclick“Next”.

Theconfirmationwindowwillbedisplayed

7. Click“Iacceptthetermsinthelicenseagreement”.

Followtheinstructionsontheinstallerscreenstocompletetheinstallation.

Step 2: Connect the projector to a LANConnecttheprojectortotheLANbyfollowingtheinstructionsin“ConnectingtoaWiredLAN”(→page133)and“10.ControllingtheProjectorbyUsinganHTTPBrowser”(→page42)

Step 3: Start PC Control Utility Pro 51. OpenyourApplicationsfolderinMacOS.

2. Clickthe“PCControlUtilityPro5”folder.

3. Clickthe“PCControlUtilityPro5”icon.

PCControlUtilityPro5willstart.

NOTE: • FortheSchedulefunctionofthePCControlutilityPro5towork,youmusthaveyourcomputerrunningandnotinsleepmode.Select“EnergySaver”fromthe“SystemPreferences”inMacanddisableitssleepmodebeforerunningthescheduler.

• When[NORMAL]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE]fromthemenu,theprojectorcannotbeturnedonviathenetwork(wiredLAN)connection.

TIP:ViewingtheHelpofPCControlUtilityPro5•DisplayingtheHelpfileofPCControlUtilityPro5whileitisrunning.• Fromthemenubar,click“Help”→ “Help” in this order.

TheHelpscreenwillbedisplayed.

•DisplayingtheHelpusingtheDock1. Open “Application Folder” in Mac OS.

2. Clickthe“PCControlUtilityPro5”folder.

3. Clickthe“PCControlUtilityPro5Help”icon.

TheHelpscreenwillbedisplayed.

Page 166: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

153

9. Appendix

❶ Throw distance and screen sizeThisprojectorcanbeusedwith3kindsofoptionallenses(soldseparately).Thechartbelowshowscompatiblelensesaccordingtotheprojectormodel.Refertotheinformationonthispageandusealenssuitedfortheinstallationenvi-ronment(screensizeandthrowdistance).Forinstructionsonmountingthelens,seepage121.

Lens(model)

Projector(modelname) NP34ZL NP35ZL NP36ZL NP37ZL

PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK Yes Yes No Yes

PX602WL-WH/PX602WL-BK Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes=canbeused,No=cannotbeused

Lens types and throw distancePX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK

Screensize LensmodelnameNP34ZL NP35ZL NP37ZL

inch m inch m inch m50" 40 - 51 1.0 - 1.3 51 - 64 1.3-1.7 63 - 123 1.6 - 3.260" 48-62 1.2 - 1.6 62-77 1.6 - 2.0 76-148 2.0-3.880" 64-83 1.7-2.1 83-104 2.1-2.7 103-198 2.6 - 5.1100" 81-104 2.1 - 2.6 104 - 130 2.7-3.3 129-248 3.3 - 6.3120" 97-125 2.5 - 3.2 124 - 156 3.2 - 4.0 155-298 4.0-7.6150" 122-157 3.1 - 4.0 156-195 4.0 - 5.0 194-373 4.9-9.5200" 163-209 4.1 - 5.3 208-261 5.3 - 6.6 260-498 6.6-12.7240" 195-251 5.0 - 6.4 250 - 313 6.4-8.0 312-598 7.9-15.2300" 244 - 314 6.2-7.9 313-392 7.9-10.0 391-748 9.9-19.0

TIPCalculationofthethrowdistancefromthescreensizeNP34ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×0.96toH×1.23:40"/1.0m(min.)to314"/7.9m(max.)NP35ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×1.23toH×1.54:51"/1.3m(min.)to392"/10.0m(max.)NP37ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×1.53toH×2.94:63"/1.6m(min.)to748"/19.0m(max.)“H”(Horizontal)referstothescreenwidth.*Figuresdifferbyseveral%withthetableabovebecausethecalculationisapproximate.Ex.:Throwdistancewhenprojectingona150"screenwiththePX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BKusingtheNP35ZLlens:Accordingtothe“ScreenSize(forreference)”table(→ page 155),H(screenwidth)=127.2"/323.1cm.Thethrowdistanceis127.2"/323.1cm×1.23to127.2"/323.1cm×1.54=156.5"/397.4cmto195.9"/497.6cm(becauseofthezoomlens).

Page 167: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

154

9. Appendix

PX602WL-WH/PX602WL-BK

Screensize LensmodelnameNP34ZL NP35ZL/NP36ZL NP37ZL

inch m inch m inch m50" 42 - 54 1.1 - 1.4 54-68 1.4-1.7 67-129 1.7-3.360" 51 - 65 1.3-1.7 65-81 1.7-2.1 80-155 2.1 - 4.080" 68-87 1.7-2.2 87-109 2.2-2.8 108-208 2.8-5.3100" 85-109 2.2-2.8 109-136 2.8-3.5 135 - 260 3.5 - 6.6120" 102 - 131 2.6 - 3.3 131 - 164 3.3 - 4.2 163 - 313 4.2-8.0150" 128-164 3.3 - 4.2 164 - 205 4.2 - 5.2 204-392 5.2 - 10.0200" 171-219 4.4 - 5.6 219-274 5.6-6.9 273-523 6.9-13.3240" 206 - 263 5.2-6.7 263-329 6.7-8.3 328-628 8.3-15.9300" 257-330 6.5-8.3 330 - 411 8.3-10.4 411-786 10.4-19.9

TIPCalculationofthethrowdistancefromthescreensizeNP34ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×1.01toH×1.29:42"/1.1m(min.)to330"/8.3m(max.)NP35ZL/NP36ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×1.29toH×1.61:54"/1.4m(min.)to411"/10.4m(max.)NP37ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×1.61toH×3.08:67"/1.7m(min.)to786"/19.9m(max.)“H”(Horizontal)referstothescreenwidth.*Figuresdifferbyseveral%withthetableabovebecausethecalculationisapproximate.Ex.:Throwdistancewhenprojectingona150"screenwiththePX602WL-WH/PX602WL-BKusingtheNP36ZLlens:Accordingtothe“ScreenSize(forreference)”table(→ page 155),H(screenwidth)=127.2"/323.1cm.Thethrowdistanceis127.2"/323.1cm×1.29to127.2"/323.1cm×1.61=164.1"/416.8cmto204.8"/520.2cm(becauseofthezoomlens).

Page 168: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

155

9. Appendix

Projectionrangeforthedifferentlenses

50-300"

50-300"50-300"

50-300"

NP34ZLPX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK: 40–314"/1.0–7.9 mPX602WL-WH/PX602WL-BK: 42–330"/1.1–8.3 m

NP36ZL PX602WL-WH/PX602WL-BK: 54–411"/1.4–10.4 m

PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK: 63–748"/1.6–19.0 mPX602WL-WH/PX602WL-BK: 67–786"/1.7–19.9 mNP37ZL

PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK: 51–392"/1.3–10.0 mPX602WL-WH/PX602WL-BK: 54–411"/1.4–10.4 mNP35ZL

Tables of screen sizes and dimensions

Screenheight

Screenwidth

16:10screensize(diagonal)

Size(inches) Screenwidth Screenheight(inches) (cm) (inches) (cm)

50 42.4 107.7 26.5 63.760 50.9 129.2 31.8 80.880 67.8 172.3 42.4 107.7100 84.8 215.4 53.0 134.6120 101.8 258.5 63.6 161.5150 127.2 323.1 79.5 201.9200 169.6 430.8 106.0 269.2240 203.5 516.9 127.2 323.1300 254.4 646.2 159.0 403.9

Page 169: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

156

9. Appendix

Lens shifting rangeThisprojectorisequippedwithalensshiftfunctionforadjustingthepositionoftheprojectedimagebyusingtheLENSSHIFTbuttons(→page19).Thelenscanbeshiftedwithintherangeshownbelow.

NOTE: • Pleasedonotusethelensshiftfunctionwhenprojectingportraitimages.Pleaseuseitwiththelensinthecenter.

Legend:V“Vertical”referstothescreenheightandH“Horizontal”referstothescreenwidth.Thelensshiftrangeisexpressedasaratioofheightandwidth,respectively.

100%V

50%V

50%V20%V* 20%V*

20%V*20%V*

100%H

15%H

15%H

15%H

15%H

10%H

10%H 10%H

10%H

Heightofprojectedimage

Widthofprojectedimage

ValueofX

PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK 20%V

PX602WL-WH/PX602WL-BK 30%V

* Thelensshiftrangeisthesameforceilinginstallation.

(Example)Whenusingtoprojectona150"screenAccordingtothe“Tableofscreensizesanddimensions”(→page155),H=127.2"/323.1cm,V=79.5"/201.9cm.Adjustmentrangeintheverticaldirection:theprojectedimagecanbemovedupwards0.5×79.5"/201.9cm≈39.8"/101cm,downwardsapproximately39.8"/101cm(whenthelensisatthecenterposition).Adjustmentrangeinthehorizontaldirection:theprojectedimagecanbemovedtotheleft0.15×127.2"/323.1cm≈19.1"/48cm,totherightapproximately19.1"/48cm.* Figuresdifferbyseveral%becausethecalculationisapproximate.

Page 170: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

157

9. Appendix

❷ Mounting the Optional Board (sold separately)CAUTIONBeforemountingorremovingtheoptionalboard,besuretoturnofftheprojector,waitforthefanstostopandturnoffthemainpowerswitch.

Toolneeded:Phillipsscrewdriver(plus-head)

1. Turnoffthemainpowerswitchoftheprojector.

2. LoosenthetwoscrewsontheSLOTcoveroftheterminals.

RemovethetwoscrewsandtheSLOTcover.

NOTE:Keepthetwoscrewsandtheslotcover.

3. Insert the optional board into the slot.

Makesurethattheboardisinsertedintotheslotinthecorrectorientation.

Incorrectorientationmaycausemiscommunicationbetweentheoptionalboardandprojector.

Page 171: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

158

9. Appendix

4. Tightenthetwoscrewsonbothsidesoftheslot.

• Besuretotightenthescrews.

Thiswillcompleteinstallationoftheoptionalboard.

Toselecttheoptionalboardsource,selectSLOTastheinput.

NOTE:• Mountingtheoptionalboardmaycausethefanstoruninthestandbymodeforthepurposeofcoolingdependingontheoptionalboard.Thefanspeedmayalsoincreaseinordertocooltheprojectorproperly.Bothoftheseinstancesareconsiderednormaland not a malfunction of the projector.

Page 172: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

159

9. Appendix

❸ Compatible Input Signal ListAnalog Computer Signal

Signal Resolution(dots) AspectRatio RefreshRate(Hz)VGA 640 × 480 4 : 3 60/72/75/85/iMacSVGA 800 × 600 4 : 3 56/60/72/75/85/iMacXGA 1024 × 768 4 : 3 60/70/75/85/iMacXGA+ 1152 × 864 4 : 3 60/70/75/85

WXGA

1280 × 768 *1 15 : 9 601280 × 800 *1 16 : 10 601360 × 768 *2 16 : 9 601366 × 768 *2 16 : 9 60

Quad-VGA 1280 × 960 4 : 3 60/75/85SXGA 1280 × 1024 5 : 4 60/75/85SXGA+ 1400 × 1050 4 : 3 60/75WXGA+ 1440 × 900 16 : 10 60WXGA++ 1600 × 900 16 : 9 60UXGA 1600 × 1200 *3 4 : 3 60/65/70/75WSXGA+ 1680 × 1050 16 : 10 60WUXGA 1920 × 1200 *3 16 : 10 60(ReducedBlanking)2K 2048 × 1080 17 : 9 60FullHD 1920 × 1080 *3 16 : 9 60MAC13" 640 × 480 4 : 3 67MAC16" 832 × 624 4 : 3 75MAC19" 1024 × 768 4 : 3 75MAC21" 1152 × 870 *4 4 : 3 75MAC23" 1280 × 1024 5 : 4 65

ComponentSignal Resolution(dots) AspectRatio RefreshRate(Hz)

HDTV(1080p) 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 50/60HDTV(1080i) 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 50/60HDTV(720p) 1280 × 720 16 : 9 50/60SDTV(480p) 720 × 480 4:3/16:9 60SDTV(576p) 720 × 576 4:3/16:9 50SDTV(480i) 720 × 480 4:3/16:9 60SDTV(576i) 720 × 576 4:3/16:9 50

CompositeVideo/S-VideoSignal AspectRatio RefreshRate(Hz)

NTSC 4 : 3 60PAL 4 : 3 50PAL60 4 : 3 60SECAM 4 : 3 50

Page 173: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

160

9. Appendix

HDMISignal Resolution(dots) AspectRatio RefreshRate(Hz)

VGA 640 × 480 4 : 3 60SVGA 800 × 600 4 : 3 60XGA 1024 × 768 4 : 3 60HD 1280 × 720 *1 16 : 9 60

WXGA1280 × 768 *1 15 : 9 601280 × 800 *1 16 : 10 601366 × 768 *2 16 : 9 60

Quad-VGA 1280 × 960 4 : 3 60SXGA 1280 × 1024 5 : 4 60SXGA+ 1400 × 1050 4 : 3 60WXGA+ 1440 × 900 16 : 10 60WXGA++ 1600 × 900 16 : 9 60WSXGA+ 1680 × 1050 16 : 10 60UXGA 1600 × 1200 *3 4 : 3 60FullHD 1920 × 1080 *3 16 : 9 60WUXGA 1920 × 1200 *3 16 : 10 60(ReducedBlanking)2K 2048 × 1080 17 : 9 60WQHD iMac27"

2560 × 1440 16 : 9 60

WQXGA 2560 × 1600 16 : 10 60(ReducedBlanking)

4K 3840 × 2160 16 : 9 23.98/24/25/29.97/304096 × 2160 17 : 9 24

HDTV(1080p) 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 50/60HDTV(1080i) 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 50/60HDTV(720p) 1280 × 720 16 : 9 50/60SDTV(480i/p) 720/1440 × 480 4:3/16:9 60SDTV(576i/p) 720/1440 × 576 4:3/16:9 50

HDMI3DSignalResolution(dots) RefreshRate(Hz) AspectRatio 3DFormat

1920 × 1080p23.98/24

16 : 9

FramePackingTopandBottom

50 SideBySide59.94/60 SideBySide

1920 × 1080i 50 SideBySide59.94/60 SideBySide

1280 × 720p

50FramePackingSideBySideTopandBottom

59.94/60FramePackingSideBySideTopandBottom

Page 174: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

161

9. Appendix

DisplayPortSignal Resolution(dots) AspectRatio RefreshRate(Hz)

VGA 640 × 480 4 : 3 60SVGA 800 × 600 4 : 3 60XGA 1024 × 768 4 : 3 60HD 1280 × 720 *1 16 : 9 60

WXGA1280 × 768 *1 15 : 9 601280 × 800 *1 16 : 10 601366 × 768 *2 16 : 9 60

Quad-VGA 1280 × 960 4 : 3 60SXGA 1280 × 1024 5 : 4 60SXGA+ 1400 × 1050 4 : 3 60WXGA+ 1440 × 900 16 : 10 60WXGA++ 1600 × 900 16 : 9 60WSXGA+ 1680 × 1050 16 : 10 60UXGA 1600 × 1200 *3 4 : 3 60FullHD 1920 × 1080 *3 16 : 9 60WUXGA 1920 × 1200 *3 16 : 10 60(ReducedBlanking)2K 2048 × 1080 17 : 9 60WQHD iMac27"

2560 × 1440 16 : 9 60

WQXGA 2560 × 1600 16 : 10 60(ReducedBlanking)

4K 3840 × 2160 16 : 9 23.98/24/25/29.97/304096 × 2160 17 : 9 24

HDTV(1080p) 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 50/60HDTV(720p) 1280 × 720 16 : 9 50/60SDTV(480i/p) 720/1440 × 480 4:3/16:9 60SDTV(576i/p) 720/1440 × 576 4:3/16:9 50

DisplayPort3DSignalResolution(dots) RefreshRate(Hz) AspectRatio 3DFormat

1920 × 1080p

23.98/24

16 : 9

SideBySideTopandBottom

25 SideBySideTopandBottom

50 SideBySideTopandBottom

59.94/60 SideBySideTopandBottom

1920 × 1080i50 TopandBottom

SideBySide

59.94/60 TopandBottomSideBySide

1280 × 720p

50 SideBySideTopandBottom

59.94/60FramePackingSideBySideTopandBottom

*1 NativeresolutiononWXGAmodel(PX602WL-WH/PX602WL-BK)*2 Theprojectormayfailtodisplaythesesignalscorrectlywhen[AUTO]isselectedfor[ASPECTRATIO]intheon-screenmenu. Thefactorydefaultis[AUTO]for[ASPECTRATIO].Todisplaythesesignals,select[16:9]for[ASPECTRATIO].*3 NativeresolutiononWUXGAmodel(PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK)*4 Theprojectormayfailtodisplaythesesignalscorrectlywhen[AUTO]isselectedfor[ASPECTRATIO]intheon-screenmenu. Thefactorydefaultis[AUTO]for[ASPECTRATIO].Todisplaythesesignals,select[4:3]for[ASPECTRATIO].

• Signalsexceedingtheprojector’sresolutionarehandledwithAdvancedAccuBlend.• WithAdvancedAccuBlend,thesizeofcharactersandruledlinesmaybeunevenandcolorsmaybeblurred.• Uponshipment,theprojectorissetforsignalswithstandarddisplayresolutionsandfrequencies,butadjustmentsmayberequired

dependingonthetypeofcomputer.

Page 175: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

162

9. Appendix

❹ SpecificationsModelname PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/PX602WL-WH/PX602WL-BKMethod SingleDLP®chipSpecificationsofmainparts

DMDpanel Size PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK:0.67"(aspectratio:16:10)PX602WL-WH/PX602WL-BK:0.65"(aspectratio:16:10)

Pixels(*1) PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK:2,304,000(1920dots×1200lines)PX602WL-WH/PX602WL-BK:1,024,000(1280dots×800lines)

Projectionlenses Zoom Powerzoom(zoomrangedependsonlens)Focus PowerfocusLensshifting Powerlensshift

Lightsource 3.5WLaserDiodeOpticaldevice Opticalisolationbydichroicmirror,combiningbydichroicprism

Lightoutput(*2) (*3) 6,000lmContrastratio(*2)(allwhite/allblack) 10,000:1withdynamiccontrastScreensize(throwdistance) 50"to300"(throwdistancedependsonlens)Colorreproducibility 10-bitcolorprocessing(approx.1.07billioncolors)Scanningfrequency Horizontal Analog:15kHz,24to100kHz(24kHzorgreaterforRGBinputs),conformingtoVESA

standardsDigital:15kHz,24to153kHz,conformingtoVESAstandards

Vertical Analog:48Hz,50to85Hz,100,120HzconformingtoVESAstandardsDigital:24,25,30,48Hz,50to85Hz,100,120HzconformingtoVESAstandards

Mainadjustmentfunctions Powerzoom,powerfocus,powerlensshift,inputsignalswitching(HDMI/DisplayPort/BNC/BNC(CV)/BNC(Y/C)/COMPUTER/HDBaseT/SLOT),autoimageadjustment,pic-turemaginification,muting(video),poweron/standby,on-screendisplay/selection,etc.

Max.displayresolution(horizontal×vertical)

Analog:1920×1200(handledwithAdvancedAccuBlend)Digital:4096×2160(handledwithAdvancedAccuBlend)

InputsignalsR,G,B,H,V RGB:0.7Vp-p/75Ω

Y:1.0Vp-p/75Ω(withNegativePolaritySync)Cb,Cr(Pb,Pr):0.7Vp-p/75ΩH/VSync:4.0Vp-p/TTLCompositeSync:4.0Vp-p/TTLSynconG:1.0Vp-p/75Ω(withSync)

Compositevideo 1.0Vp-p/75ΩS-Video Y:1.0Vp-p/75Ω

C:286Vp-p/75ΩComponent Y:1.0Vp-p/75Ω(withSync)

Cb,Cr(Pb,Pr):0.7Vp-p/75ΩDTV:480i,480p,720p,1080i,1080p(60Hz)

576i,576p,720p,1080i,1080p(50Hz)DVD:Progressivesignal(50/60Hz)

Input/outputterminalsComputer/Com-ponent

Videoinput MiniD-Sub15-pin×1,BNCterminal×5

HDMI Videoinput HDMI®TerminaltypeA×1DeepColor(colordepth):8-/10-/12-bitcompatibleColorimetry:RGB,YcbCr444andYcbCr422compatibleLipSynccompatible,HDCPcompatible(*4),Supports4Kand3D

Videooutput RepeaterAudioinput HDMI:Samplingfrequency–32/44.1/48kHz,Samplingbits–16/20/24bits

HDBaseT Videoinput DeepColor(colordepth):Support8/10/12bitsColorimetry:SupportRGB,YCbCr444andYCbCr422SupportLipSync,HDCP(*4),4K,3D

Audioinput Samplingfrequency:32/44.1/48kHzSamplingbit:16/20/24bit

DisplayPort Videoinput DisplayPort×1Datarate:2.7Gbps/1.62GbpsNo.lanes:1lane/2lanes/4lanesColordepth:6-bit,8-bit,10-bitColorimetry:RGB,YcbCr444andYcbCr422compatibleHDCPcompatible(*4)

Audioinput DisplayPort:Samplingfrequency–32/44.1/48kHz,Samplingbits–16/20/24bitsBNC(CV) Videoinput BNC×1BNC(Y/C) Videoinput BNC×2PCcontrolterminal D-Sub9-pin×1USBport USBtypeA×1Ethernet/HDBaseTport RJ-45×1,SupportsBASE-TX

Page 176: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

163

9. Appendix

Modelname PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/PX602WL-WH/PX602WL-BKRemoteterminal Stereominijack×13DSYNCoutputterminal 5V/10mA,synchronizedsignaloutputfor3Duse

Usageenvironment Operatingtemperature:5to40°C(*5)

Operatinghumidity:20to80%(withnocondensation)Storagetemperature:-10to60°C(*5)

Storagehumidity:20to80%(withnocondensation)Operatingaltitude:0to3000m/10,000feet(760to3000m/2500to10,000feet:Set[FANMODE]to[HIGH])

Powersupply 100-240VAC,50/60HzPowercon-sumption

LIGHTMODE

NORMAL 590W(100-130V)/550W(200-240V)ECO1 460 W (100-130 V)/440 W (200-240 V)ECO2 280W(100-130V)/270W(200-240V)

STAND-BYMODE

NORMAL 0.5 WNETWORKSTANDBY

6.0 W

Ratedinputcurrent 6.8A-2.5AExternaldimensions 19.1"(width)×7.7"(height)×20.0"(depth)/484.4(width)×195.0(height)×509.0

(depth)mm(notincludingthelenshoodandprotrudingparts)19.1"(width)×8.5"(height)×22.6"(depth)/484.4(width)×217.0(height)×574.8(depth)mm(includingthelenshoodandprotrudingparts)

Weight 40.8lbs/18.5kg(notincludinglens)

*1 Effectivepixelsaremorethan99.99%.*2 Thisisthelightoutputvaluethatresultsfromsettingthe[LIGHTMODE]to[NORMAL]andsettingthe[PRESET]to[HIGH-BRIGHT]

whileusingtheNP35ZLlensforNP-PX602UL-WHJD,orNP36ZLlensforNP-PX602WL-WHJD(soldseparately). Thelightoutputvalueislowerwhensettingthe[LIGHTMODE]to[ECO1]or[ECO2].([ECO1]:about80%,[ECO2]:about50%).

Ifanyothermodeisselectedasthe[PRESET]mode,thelightoutputvaluemaydropslightly.*3 CompliancewithISO21118-2012*4 HDMI®(DeepColor,LipSync)withHDCP WhatisHDCP/HDCPtechnology? HDCPisanacronymforHigh-bandwidthDigitalContentProtection.HighbandwidthDigitalContentProtection(HDCP)isasystem

forpreventingillegalcopyingofvideodatasentoveraHigh-DefinitionMultimediaInterface(HDMI). IfyouareunabletoviewmaterialviatheHDMIinput,thisdoesnotnecessarilymeantheprojectorisnotfunctioningproperly.With

theimplementationofHDCP,theremaybecasesinwhichcertaincontentisprotectedwithHDCPandmightnotbedisplayedduetothedecision/intentionoftheHDCPcommunity(DigitalContentProtection,LLC).

Video:DeepColor;8/10/12-bit,LipSync Audio:LPCM;upto2ch,samplerate32/44.1/48KHz,samplebit;16/20/24-bit*5 Theupperthresholdofoperatingtemperatureischangeddependsonthealtitude. 0–760m(0–2500feet):5–40°C 760–1500m(2500–5000feet):5–35°C 1500–3000m(5000–10000feet):5–30°C 35to40°C–“Forcedecomode”• Thesespecificationsandtheproduct’sdesignaresubjecttochangewithoutnotice.

Foradditionalinformationvisit:US:http://www.necdisplay.com/Europe:http://www.nec-display-solutions.com/Global:http://www.nec-display.com/global/index.htmlForinformationonouroptionalaccessories,visitourwebsiteorseeourbrochure.

Page 177: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

164

9. Appendix

Optionlens(soldseparately)OptionlensforPX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BKNP34ZL Powerlensshift,Powerzoom,Powerfocus

(Throwratio0.96–1.23:1,F2.3–2.57,f=0.55–0.71"/14.03–17.95mm)NP35ZL Powerlensshift,Powerzoom,Powerfocus

(Throwratio1.23–1.54:1,F2.0–2.32,f=0.71–0.89"/18.07–22.59mm)NP37ZL Powerlensshift,Powerzoom,Powerfocus

(Throwratio1.53–2.94:1,F2.3–3.39,f=0.89–1.69"/22.56–42.87mm)

OptionlensforPX602WL-WH/PX602WL-BKNP34ZL Powerlensshift,Powerzoom,Powerfocus

(Throwratio1.01–1.29:1,F2.3–2.57,f=0.55–0.71"/14.03–17.95mm)NP35ZL Powerlensshift,Powerzoom,Powerfocus

(Throwratio1.29–1.61:1,F2.0–2.32,f=0.71–0.89"/18.07–22.59mm)NP36ZL Powerlensshift,Powerzoom,Powerfocus

(Throwratio1.29–1.61:1,F2.0–2.32,f=0.71–0.89"/18.07–22.59mm)NP37ZL Powerlensshift,Powerzoom,Powerfocus

(Throwratio1.61–3.08:1,F2.3–3.39,f=0.89–1.69"/22.56–42.87mm)

Page 178: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

165

9. Appendix

❺ Cabinet Dimensions

Unit:mm(inch)

484.4 (19.1)150 (5.9)

509

(20)

195

(7.7

)

217

(8.5

)

101

(4)

89 (3

.5)

94.5

(3

.7)

150

(5.9

)15

0 (5

.9)

574.

8 (2

2.6)

300 (11.8) Lenscenter

Lenscenter

6-M4×L8(Max)forCeilingMount*

* ThescrewsspecificationsforCeilingMount: Screwtype:M4 Maximumscrewlength:8mm(0.31") Minimumscrewlength:6mm(0.24")

CAUTION:Donotattempttomounttheprojectoronaceilingyourself.Theprojectormustbeinstalledbyqualifiedtechniciansinordertoensureproperoperationandreducetheriskofbodilyinjury.Inaddition,theceilingmustbestrongenoughtosupporttheprojectorandtheinstallationmustbeinaccordancewithanylocalbuildingcodes.Pleaseconsultyourdealerformoreinformation.

Page 179: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

166

9. Appendix

❻ Pin assignments and signal names of main terminalsCOMPUTER 1 IN/ Component Input Terminal (Mini D-Sub 15 Pin)

Connection and signal level of each pin

51 42 310

11 12 13 14 156 97 8

Signal LevelVideosignal:0.7Vp-p(Analog)Syncsignal:TTLlevel

PinNo. RGBSignal(Analog) YCbCrSignal1 Red Cr2 GreenorSynconGreen Y3 Blue Cb4 Ground5 Ground6 RedGround CrGround7 GreenGround YGround8 BlueGround CbGround9 NoConnection10 SyncSignalGround11 NoConnection12 Bi-directionalDATA(SDA)13 HorizontalSyncorCompositeSync14 VerticalSync15 DataClock

HDMI IN Terminal (Type A)

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 192 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18

PinNo. Signal PinNo. Signal1 TMDSData2+ 11 TMDSClockShield2 TMDSData2Shield 12 TMDSClock−3 TMDSData2− 13 CEC4 TMDSData1+ 14 Disconnection5 TMDSData1Shield 15 SCL6 TMDSData1− 16 SDA7 TMDSData0+ 17 DDC/CECgrounding8 TMDSData0Shield 18 +5Vpowersupply9 TMDSData0− 19 Hotplugdetection10 TMDSClock+

DisplayPort IN Terminal

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 192 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

PinNo. Signal PinNo. Signal1 Mainlinklane3− 11 Grounding02 Grounding3 12 Mainlinklane0+3 Mainlinklane3+ 13 Configuration14 Mainlinklane2− 14 Configuration25 Grounding2 15 Supplementarychannel+6 Mainlinklane2+ 16 Grounding47 Mainlinklane1− 17 Supplementarychannel−8 Grounding1 18 Hotplugdetection9 Mainlinklane1+ 19 Return10 Mainlinklane0− 20 +3.3Vpowersupply

Page 180: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

167

9. Appendix

Ethernet/HDBaseT Port (RJ-45)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

PinNo. Signal1 TxD+/HDBT0+2 TxD−/HDBT0−3 RxD+/HDBT1+4 Disconnection/HDBT2+5 Disconnection/HDBT2−6 RxD−/HDBT1−7 Disconnection/HDBT3+8 Disconnection/HDBT3−

USB Port (Type A)

1

3

2

4

PinNo. Signal1 VBUS

2 D−3 D+4 Grounding

PC CONTROL Port (D-Sub 9 Pin)

12345

6789

Communications protocol

PinNo. Signal1 Unused2 RxD receptiondata3 TxD transmissiondata4 Unused5 Grounding6 Unused7 RTS transmissionrequest8 CTS transmissionallowed9 Unused

Page 181: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

168

9. Appendix

❼ TroubleshootingThissectionhelpsyouresolveproblemsyoumayencounterwhilesettinguporusingtheprojector.

Indicator Messages

POWERIndicator

Indicatordisplay Projectorstatus Procedure

Off Powerisoff. –

Flashing Blue(shortflashes) Preparingtoturnpoweron Waitawhile.

Blue(longflashes) Offtimer(enabled)Programtimer(offtimeenabled)

Orange(shortflashes) Projectorcooling Waitawhile.

Orange(longflashes) Programtimer(ontimeenabled) –

Lit Blue Poweron –

Red Standbymode(NORMAL) –

Orange Standbymode(NETWORKSTANDBY) –

STATUS Indicator

Indicatordisplay Projectorstatus Procedure

Off Noproblem,orSTAND-BYMODE-“NETWORKSTANDBY”

Flashing Red Thelenshoodisnotfixedon,orthesafetycover(soldseparately)isnotfixedonduringtheportraitprojection

Checkfixingconditionsof the lenshoodand thesafetycover.

Red(cycleof4timesflash)

Fanproblem The cooling fan has stopped turning.Contact anNECprojectorcustomersupportcenterforrepairs.

Lit Green STANDBYMODEinsleepmode*

Orange Buttonhasbeenpressedwhileprojectorisinkeylockmode

Theprojector’skeysarelocked.Thesettingmustbecan-celedtooperatetheprojector.(→Page104)

Projector’sIDnumberandremotecontrol’sIDnumberdonotmatch

CheckthecontrolIDs.(→Pages105)

* Sleepmodereferstothestatewherebythefunctionalrestrictionsduetothestandbymodesettingareremoved.

Page 182: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

169

9. Appendix

LIGHT Indicator

Indicatordisplay Projectorstatus Procedure

Off Thelightmoduleisturnedoff.

Lit Green Lightmodulelit –

TEMP.Indicator

Indicatordisplay Projectorstatus Procedure

Off Noproblem

Flashing Red(cyclesof2)

Temperatureproblem Thetemperatureprotectorhasbeenactivated.Iftheroomtemperatureishigh,movetheprojectortoacoolplace.Iftheproblemstillpersists,contactanNECprojectorcus-tomersupportcenter.

Lit Orange Highsurroundingtem-perature(ForcedECOMode)

The surrounding temperature is high. Lower the roomtemperature.

If the temperature protector is activatedIftheprojector’sinternaltemperaturerisesabnormally,thelightmoduleturnsoffandthetemperatureindicatorflashes(repeatedlyincyclesof2).Itmayhappenthattheprojector’stemperatureprotectorissimultaneouslyactivatedandtheprojector’spowerturnsoff.Ifthishappens,dothefollowing:

- Unplugthepowercordfromthepoweroutlet.

- Ifusinginaplacewherethesurroundingtemperatureishigh,movetheprojectortoadifferent,coolplace.

- Ifthereisdustintheventilationholes,clean.(→page141)

- Waitassuchabout1hourfortheprojector’sinternaltemperaturetolower.

Page 183: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

170

9. Appendix

Common Problems & Solutions(→“POWER/STATUS/LIGHTIndicator”onpage168,169.)

Problem CheckTheseItems

Does not turn onor shut down

• Checkthatthepowercordispluggedinandthatthepowerbuttonontheprojectorcabinetortheremotecontrol is on� (→ pages 13, 14)

• Checktoseeiftheprojectorhasoverheated.Ifthereisinsufficientventilationaroundtheprojectororiftheroom where you are presenting is particularly warm, move the projector to a cooler location�

• Thelightmodulemayfailtolight.Waitafullminuteandthenturnonthepoweragain.• Set[FANMODE]to[HIGH]whenusingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately760m/2500feetorhigher.

Using the projector at altitudes approximately 760 m/2500 feet or higher without setting to [HIGH] can cause the projector to overheat and the projector could shut down� If this happens, wait a couple minutes and turn on the projector� (→ page 97)

If you turn on the projector immediately after the light module is turned off, the fans run without displaying an image for some time and then the projector will display the image� Wait for a moment�

• Incaseit’shardtothinkthetroubleisnotcausedontheabovementionedconditions,unplugthepowercord from the outlet� Then wait 5 minutes before plugging it in again� (→ page 24)

Will turn off • Ensurethatthe[OFFTIMER],[AUTOPOWEROFF]or[PROGRAMTIMER]isoff.(→ page 100, 115)

No picture • Checkiftheappropriateinputisselected.(→ page 16) If there is still no picture, press the SOURCE button or one of the source buttons again�

• Ensureyourcablesareconnectedproperly.• Usemenustoadjustthebrightnessandcontrast.(→ page 76)• CheckthattheSHUTTER(lensshutter)orAVMUTE(imageoff)buttonsarenotpressed.• Resetthesettingsoradjustmentstofactorypresetlevelsusingthe[RESET]intheMenu.(→ page 116)• EnteryourregisteredkeywordiftheSecurityfunctionisenabled.(→ page 35)• IftheHDMIINortheDisplayPortINsignalcannotbedisplayed,trythefollowing.

- Reinstall your driver for the graphics card built in your computer, or use the updated driver� For reinstalling or updating your driver, refer to the user guide accompanied with your computer or

graphics card, or contact the support center for your computer manufacturer� Install the updated driver or OS on your own responsibility� We are not liable for any trouble and failure caused by this installation�

• SignalsmaynotbesupporteddependingontheHDBaseTtransmissiondevice.IRandRS232Ccannotbeused in certain cases as well�

• BesuretoconnecttheprojectorandnotebookPCwhiletheprojectorisinstandbymodeandbeforeturningon the power to the notebook PC�

In most cases the output signal from the notebook PC is not turned on unless connected to the projector before being powered up�* If the screen goes blank while using your remote control, it may be the result of the computer’s screen-

saver or power management software�• Seealsothepage172�

Picture suddenly becomes dark

• CheckiftheprojectorisintheForcedECOmodebecauseoftoohighambienttemperature.Ifthisisthecase, lower the internal temperature of the projector by selecting [HIGH] for [FAN MODE]� (→ page 97)

Color tone or hue is unusual

• Checkifanappropriatecolorisselectedin[WALLCOLOR].Ifso,selectanappropriateoption.(→ page 97)

• Adjust[HUE]in[PICTURE].(→ page 77)

Image isn’t square to the screen

• Repositiontheprojectortoimproveitsangletothescreen.(→ page 18)• UsetheKeystonecorrectionfunctiontocorrectthetrapezoiddistortion.(→ page 32)

Picture is blurred • Adjustthefocus.(→ page 21)• Repositiontheprojectortoimproveitsangletothescreen.(→ page 18)• Ensure that thedistancebetween theprojectorandscreen iswithin theadjustment rangeof the lens.

(→ page 153)• Hasthelensbeenshiftedbyanamountexceedingtheguaranteedrange?(→ page 156)• Condensationmayformonthelensiftheprojectoriscold,broughtintoawarmplaceandisthenturned

on� Should this happen, let the projector stand until there is no condensation on the lens�

Image is scrolling vertically, horizontally or both

• Checkthecomputer’sresolutionandfrequency.Makesurethattheresolutionyouaretryingtodisplayissupported by the projector� (→ page 159)

• AdjustthecomputerimagemanuallywiththeHorizontal/Verticalinthe[IMAGEOPTIONS].(→ page 79)

Remote control does not work

• Installnewbatteries.(→ page 10)• Makesuretherearenoobstaclesbetweenyouandtheprojector.• Standwithin22feet(7m)oftheprojector.(→ page 11)

Page 184: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

171

9. Appendix

Problem CheckTheseItems

Indicator is lit or blinking

• SeethePOWER/STATUS/LIGHTIndicator.(→ page 168, 169)

Cross color in RGB mode

• PresstheAUTOADJ.buttonontheprojectorcabinetortheremotecontrol.(→ page 23)• Adjustthecomputerimagemanuallywith[CLOCK]/[PHASE]in[IMAGEOPTIONS]inthemenu.(→ page

78)

Formoreinformationcontactyourdealer.

Page 185: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

172

9. Appendix

If there is no picture, or the picture is not displayed correctly.

• PoweronprocessfortheprojectorandthePC.

BesuretoconnecttheprojectorandnotebookPCwhiletheprojectorisinstandbymodeandbeforeturningonthepowertothenotebookPC.

InmostcasestheoutputsignalfromthenotebookPCisnotturnedonunlessconnectedtotheprojectorbeforebeingpoweredup.

NOTE:Youcancheckthehorizontalfrequencyofthecurrentsignalintheprojector’smenuunderInformation.Ifitreads“0kHz”,thismeansthereisnosignalbeingoutputfromthecomputer.(→ page 117orgotonextstep)

• Enablingthecomputer’sexternaldisplay.

DisplayinganimageonthenotebookPC’sscreendoesnotnecessarilymeanitoutputsasignaltotheprojector.WhenusingaPCcompatiblelaptop,acombinationoffunctionkeyswillenable/disabletheexternaldisplay.Usu-ally,thecombinationofthe“Fn”keyalongwithoneofthe12functionkeysgetstheexternaldisplaytocomeonoroff.Forexample,NEClaptopsuseFn+F3,whileDelllaptopsuseFn+F8keycombinationstotogglethroughexternaldisplayselections.

• Non-standardsignaloutputfromthecomputer

IftheoutputsignalfromanotebookPCisnotanindustrystandard,theprojectedimagemaynotbedisplayedcorrectly.Shouldthishappen,deactivatethenotebookPC’sLCDscreenwhentheprojectordisplayisinuse.EachnotebookPChasadifferentwayofdeactivate/reactivatethelocalLCDscreensasdescribedinthepreviousstep.Refertoyourcomputer’sdocumentationfordetailedinformation.

• ImagedisplayedisincorrectwhenusingaMac

WhenusingaMacwiththeprojector,settheDIPswitchoftheMacadapter(notsuppliedwiththeprojector)ac-cordingtoyourresolution.Aftersetting,restartyourMacforthechangestotakeaffect.

ForsettingdisplaymodesotherthanthosesupportedbyyourMacandtheprojector,changingtheDIPswitchonaMacadaptermaybounceanimageslightlyormaydisplaynothing.Shouldthishappen,settheDIPswitchtothe13"fixedmodeandthenrestartyourMac.Afterthat,restoretheDIPswitchestoadisplayablemodeandthenrestarttheMacagain.

NOTE:AVideoAdaptercablemanufacturedbyAppleComputerisneededforaMacBookwhichdoesnothaveaminiD-Sub15-pin terminal.

• MirroringonaMacBook

* WhenusingtheprojectorwithaMacBook,outputmaynotbesetto1024×768unless“mirroring”isoffonyourMacBook.Refertoowner’smanualsuppliedwithyourMaccomputerformirroring.

• FoldersoriconsarehiddenontheMacscreen

Foldersoriconsmaynotbeseenonthescreen.Shouldthishappen,select[View]→[Arrange]fromtheApplemenuandarrangeicons.

Page 186: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

173

9. Appendix

❽ PC Control Codes and Cable ConnectionPC Control Codes

Function Code Data

POWER ON 02H 00H 00H 00H 00H 02H

POWER OFF 02H 01H 00H 00H 00H 03H

INPUT SELECT HDMI 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H A1H A9H

INPUT SELECT DisplayPort 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H A6H AEH

INPUT SELECT BNC 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 02H 0AH

INPUT SELECT BNC(CV) 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 06H 0EH

INPUT SELECT BNC(Y/C) 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 0BH 13H

INPUT SELECT COMPUTER 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 01H 09H

INPUT SELECT HDBaseT 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 20H 28H

INPUT SELECT SLOT 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H ABH B3H

PICTURE MUTE ON 02H 10H 00H 00H 00H 12H

PICTURE MUTE OFF 02H 11H 00H 00H 00H 13H

NOTE:ContactyourlocaldealerforafulllistofthePCControlCodesifneeded.

Cable ConnectionCommunicationProtocol

Baud rate �����������������������������������������38400 bpsData length ��������������������������������������8 bitsParity �����������������������������������������������No parityStop bit ��������������������������������������������One bitX on/off ��������������������������������������������NoneCommunications procedure �������������Full duplex

NOTE:Dependingontheequipment,alowerbaudratemayberecommendedforlongcableruns.

PC Control Terminal (D-SUB 9P)

NOTE1:Pins1,4,6and9arenoused.

NOTE2:Jumper“RequesttoSend”and“CleartoSend”togetheronbothendsofthecabletosimplifycableconnection.

NOTE3:Forlongcablerunsitisrecommendedtosetcommunicationspeedwithinprojectormenusto9600bps.

1 52 43

6 7 98

ToGNDofPC

ToRxDofPC

ToTxDofPC

ToRTSofPC

ToCTSofPC

Page 187: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

174

9. Appendix

❾ Troubleshooting Check ListBeforecontactingyourdealerorservicepersonnel,checkthefollowinglist tobesurerepairsareneededalsobyreferringtothe“Troubleshooting”sectioninyouruser’smanual.Thischecklistbelowwillhelpussolveyourproblemmoreefficiently.* Printthispageandthenextpageforyourcheck.

Frequency of occurrence □ always □sometimes(Howoften?_____________________) □other(__________________)

Power□ No power (POWER indicator does not light blue)� See also “Status

Indicator (STATUS)”�□ Power cord’s plug is fully inserted into the wall outlet�□ No power even though you press and hold the POWER button�□ The main power switch is in the “ON (I)” position�

□ Shut down during operation�□ Power cord’s plug is fully inserted into the wall outlet�□ [AUTO POWER OFF] is turned off (only models with the [AUTO

POWER OFF] function)�□ [OFF TIMER] is turned off (only models with the [OFF TIMER]

function)�

Video and Audio□ No image is displayed from your PC or video equipment to the

projector�□ Still no image even though you connect the projector to the PC

first, then start the PC�□ Enabling your notebook PC’s signal output to the projector�

• Acombinationoffunctionkeyswillenable/disabletheexter-naldisplay.Usually,thecombinationofthe“Fn”keyalongwith one of the 12 function keys turns the external display on or off.

□ No image (blue or black background, no display)�□ Still no image even though you press the AUTO ADJUST button�□ Still no image even though you carry out [RESET] in the

projector’s menu�□ Signal cable’s plug is fully inserted into the input terminal□ A message appears on the screen�

(_____________________________________________)□ The source connected to the projector is active and available�□ Still no image even though you adjust the brightness and/or

the contrast�□ Input source’s resolution and frequency are supported by the

projector�□ Image is too dark�

□ Remains unchanged even though you adjust the brightness and/or the contrast�

□ Image is distorted�□ Image appears to be trapezoidal (unchanged even though you

carry out the [KEYSTONE] adjustment)�

□ Parts of the image are lost�□ Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJUST

button�□ Still unchanged even though you carry out [RESET] in the

projector’s menu�□ Image is shifted in the vertical or horizontal direction�

□ Horizontal and vertical positions are correctly adjusted on a computer signal�

□ Input source’s resolution and frequency are supported by the projector�

□ Some pixels are lost�□ Image is flickering�

□ Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJUST button�

□ Still unchanged even though you carry out [RESET] in the projector’s menu�

□ Image shows flickering or color drift on a computer signal�□ Still unchanged even though you change [FAN MODE] from

[HIGH] to [AUTO]�□ Image appears blurry or out of focus�

□ Still unchanged even though you checked the signal’s resolution on PC and changed it to projector’s native resolution�

□ Still unchanged even though you adjusted the focus�

Other□ Remote control does not work�

□ No obstacles between the sensor of the projector and the remote control�

□ Projector is placed near a fluorescent light that can disturb the infrared remote controls�

□ Batteries are new and are not reversed in installation�

□ Buttons on the projector cabinet do not work (only models with the [CONTROL PANEL LOCK] function)□ [CONTROL PANEL LOCK] is not turned on or is disabled in

the menu�□ Still unchanged even though you press and hold the SOURCE

button for a minimum of 10 seconds�

Page 188: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

175

9. Appendix

In the space below please describe your problem in detail.

Information on application and environment where your projector is used

Projector PC

Blu-rayplayer

Projector

Model number:Serial No�:Date of purchase:Light module operating time (hours):Eco Mode: □ OFF □ ONInformation on input signal:

Horizontal synch frequency [ ] kHzVertical synch frequency [ ] HzSynch polarity H □ (+) □ (−) V □ (+) □ (−)Synch type □ Separate □ Composite □ Sync on Green

STATUS Indicator:Steady light □ Orange □ GreenFlashing light [ ] cycles

Remote control model number:

Installation environment

Screen size: inchScreen type: □ White matte □ Beads □ Polarization

□ Wide angle □ High contrastThrow distance: feet/inch/mOrientation: □ Ceiling mount □ DesktopPower outlet connection:□ Connected directly to wall outlet□ Connected to power cord extender or other (the

numberofconnectedequipment______________)□ Connected to a power cord reel or other (the number

ofconnectedequipment______________)

Computer

Manufacturer:

Model number:

Notebook PC □ / Desktop □

Native resolution:

Refresh rate:

Video adapter:

Other:

Videoequipment

VCR, Blu-ray player, Video camera, Video game or other

Manufacturer:

Model number:Signal cable

NECstandardorothermanufacturer’scable?Model number: Length: inch/m

Distribution amplifierModel number:

SwitcherModel number:

AdapterModel number:

Page 189: Projector PX602UL-WH/PX602UL-BK/ PX602WL-WH ......NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this

©NECDisplaySolutions,Ltd.2014–2016 7N952063